Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 231

QUICK REFRESHER GUIDE

For
Electronics
&
Communication Engineering

By

www.thegateacademy.com
Quick Refresher Guide Contents

CONTENTS

Part Page No.


#1. Mathemathics 1 – 42
1.1 Linear Algebra 1–8
1.2 Probability & distribution 9 – 14
1.3. Numerical Method 15 – 19
1.4. Calculus 20 – 30
1.5. Differential Equations 31 – 37
1.6. Complex Variables 38 – 42

#2. Network Theory 43 – 69


2.1 Network Solution Methodology 43 – 49
2.2 Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to dc Input 50 – 54
2.3 Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis 55 – 62
2.4 Transfer Function of an LTI System 63 – 64
2.5 Two Port Networks 65 – 66
2.6 Network Topology 67 – 69

#3. Signals & Systems 70 – 87


3.1 Introduction to Signals & Systems 70 – 72
3.2 Linear Time Invariant (LTI) Systems 73 – 74
3.3 Fourier Representation of Signals 75 – 77
3.4 Z-Transform 78 – 80
3.5 Laplace Transform 81 – 83
3.6 Frequency response of LTI systems and Diversified Topics 84 – 87

#4. Control System 88 – 114


4.1 Basics of Control System 88 – 90
4.2 Time Domain Analysis 91 – 94
4.3 Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion 95 – 96
4.4 Root Locus Technique 97 – 98
4.5 Frequency Response Analysis using Nyquist Plot 99 – 101
4.6 Frequency Response Analysis using Bode Plot 102 – 104
4.7 Compensators & Controllers 105 – 110
4.8 State Variable Analysis 111 – 114

#5. Digital Circuits 115 – 138


5.1 Numebr Systems & Code Conversions 115 – 116
5.2 Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps 117 – 118
5.3 Logic Gates 119 – 122
5.4 Logic Gate Families 123 – 124
5.5 Combinational Digital Circuits 125 – 129

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page.I
Quick Refresher Guide Contents

5.6 AD /DA Convertor 130


5.7 Semiconductor Memory 131
5.8 Introduction to Microprocessors 132 – 138

#6. Analog Circuits 139 – 170


6.1 Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application 139 – 145
6.2 DC Biasing-BJTs 146 – 150
6.3 Small Signal Modeling Of BJT and FET 151 – 155
6.4 Operational Amplifiers and Their Applications 156 – 159
6.5 Feedback and Oscillator Circuits Feedback Amplifiers 160 – 161
6.6 Power Amplifiers 162 – 163
6.7 BJT and JFET Frequency Response 164 – 170

#7. Electronics Devices & Circuits 171 – 194


7.1 Semiconductor Theory 171 – 177
7.2 P-N Junction Theory and Characteristics 178 – 182
7.3 Transistor Theory (BJT, FET) 183 – 192
7.4 Basics of OPTO Electronics 193 – 194

#8. Communication Systems 195 – 209


8.1 Basics of Communication Signals 195
8.2 Amplitude Modulation (AM) 196 – 197
8.3 DSBSC and SSB Modulation 198 – 199
8.4 Vestigial Sideband (VSB) Modulation 200
8.5 Angle Modulation 201 – 204
8.6 Superhetrodyne Receivers 205
8.7 Noise in Analog Modulation 206
8.8 Digital Communications 207 – 209

#9. Electromagnetic Theory 210 – 225


9.1 Electromagnetic Field 210 – 214
9.2 EM Wave Propagation 215 – 217
9.3 Transmission Lines 218 – 219
9.4 Guided E.M Waves 220 – 222
9.5 Antennas 223 – 225

#Reference Books 226 -227

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page.II
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Part - 1: Mathematics
1.1 Linear Algebra

1.1.1 Matrix

Definition: A system of “m n” numbers arranged along m rows and n columns.

Conventionally, single capital letter is used to denote a matrix.


Thus,
a a a a
a a a a
A=[ a ]
a
a a a

a ith row, jth column

1.1.1.1 Types of Matrices

1.1.1.2 Row and Column Matrices


 Row Matrix [ 2, 7, 8, 9] single row ( or row vector)

 Column Matrix [1 ] single column (or column vector)


1
1

1.1.1.3 Square Matrix

 Same number of rows and columns.


 Order of Square matrix no. of rows or columns
 Principle Diagonal (or Main diagonal or Leading diagonal): The diagonal of a square
matrix (from the top left to the bottom right) is called as principal diagonal.
 Trace of the Matrix: The sum of the diagonal elements of a square matrix.
- tr (λ A) = λ tr(A) , λ is scalar-
- tr ( A+B) = tr (A) + tr (B)
- tr (AB) = tr (BA)

1.1.1.4 Rectangular Matrix

Number of rows Number of columns

1.1.1.5 Diagonal Matrix


A Square matrix in which all the elements except those in leading diagonal are zero.

e.g. [ ]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 1
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.1.1.6 Unit Matrix (or Identity Matrix)

A Diagonal matrix in which all the leading diagonal elements are ‘1’.
1
e.g. I = [ 1 ]
1

1.1.1.7 Null Matrix (or Zero Matrix)

A matrix is said to be Null Matrix if all the elements are zero.


e.g. 0 1

1.1.1.8 Symmetric and Skew Symmetric Matrices:


 Symmetric, when a = +a for all i and j. In other words =A
 Skew symmetric, when a = - a In other words = -A

Note: All the diagonal elements of skew symmetric matrix must be zero.
Symmetric Skew symmetric
a h g h g
[h b f ] [h f]
g f c g f
Symmetric Matrix 𝐀𝐓 = A Skew Symmetric Matrix 𝐀𝐓 = - A

1.1.1.9 Triangular Matrix


 A matrix is said to be “upper triangular” if all the elements below its principal diagonal
are zeros.
 A matrix is said to be “lower triangular” if all the elements above its principal diagonal
are zeros.
a h g a
[ b f ] [ g b ]
c f h c
Upper Triangular Matrix Lower Triangular Matrix

1.1.1.10 Orthogonal Matrix: If A. A = I, then matrix A is said to be Orthogonal matrix.

1.1.1.11 Singular Matrix: If |A| = 0, then A is called a singular matrix.

1.1.1.12 Unitary Matrix: If we define, A = (A ̅) = transpose of a conjugate of matrix A


Then the matrix is unitary if A . A = I

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 2
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.1.1.13 Hermitian Matrix: It is a square matrix with complex entries which is equal to its own
conjugate transpose.

A = A or a = a̅̅̅

1.1.1.14 Note: In Hermitian matrix, diagonal elements always real

1.1.1.15 Skew Hermitian matrix:


It is a square matrix with complex entries which is equal to the negative of conjugate
transpose.

A = A or a = a̅̅̅

Note: In Skew-Hermitian matrix , diagonal elements either zero or Pure Imaginary

1.1.1.16 Idempotent Matrix

If A = A, then the matrix A is called idempotent matrix.

1.1.1.17 Multiplication of Matrix by a Scalar:

Every element of the matrix gets multiplied by that scalar.

Multiplication of Matrices:

Two matrices can be multiplied only when number of columns of the first matrix is equal to the
number of rows of the second matrix. Multiplication of (m n)
and (n p) matrices results in matrix of (m p)dimension , - , - =, - .

1.1.1.18 Determinant:

An n order determinant is an expression associated with n n square matrix.

If A = [a ] , Element a with ith row, jth column.

a a
For n = 2 , D = det A = |a a |=a a -a a

Determinant of “order n”
a a a a
a a
D = |A| = det A = || |
|
a a a

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 3
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.1.1.19 Minors & Co-Factors:

 The minor of an element in a determinant is the determinant obtained by deleting the


row and the column which intersect that element.
 Cofactor is the minor with “proper sign”. The sign is given by (-1) (where the element
belongs to i row, j column).
th th

1.1.1.20 Properties of Determinants:


1. A determinant remains unaltered by changing its rows into columns and columns into
rows.
2. If two parallel lines of a determinant are inter-changed, the determinant retains its
numerical values but changes its sign. (In a general manner, a row or a column is
referred as line).
3. Determinant vanishes if two parallel lines are identical.
4. If each element of a line be multiplied by the same factor, the whole determinant is
multiplied by that factor. [Note the difference with matrix].
5. If each element of a line consists of the m terms, then determinant can be expressed as
sum of the m determinants.
6. If each element of a line be added equi-multiple of the corresponding elements of one or
more parallel lines, determinant is unaffected.
e.g. by the operation, + p +q , determinant is unaffected.
7. Determinant of an upper triangular/ lower triangular/diagonal/scalar matrix is equal to
the product of the leading diagonal elements of the matrix.
8. If A & B are square matrix of the same order, then |AB|=|BA|=|A||B|.
9. If A is non singular matrix, then |A |=| | (as a result of previous).
10. Determinant of a skew symmetric matrix (i.e. A =-A) of odd order is zero.
11. If A is a unitary matrix or orthogonal matrix (i.e. A = A ) then |A|= ±1.
12. If A is a square matrix of order n, then |k A| = |A|.
13. |I | = 1 ( I is the identity matrix of order n).

1.1.1.21 Inverse of a Matrix

 A = | |
 |A| must be non-zero (i.e. A must be non-singular).
 Inverse of a matrix, if exists, is always unique.
a b d b
 If it is a 2x2 matrix 0 1 , its inverse will be 0 1
c d c a

Important Points:
1. IA = AI = A, (Here A is square matrix of the same order as that of I )
2. 0 A = A 0 = 0, (Here 0 is null matrix)
3. If AB = , then it is not necessarily that A or B is null matrix. Also it doesn’t mean BA = .
4. If the product of two non-zero square matrices A & B is a zero matrix, then A & B are
singular matrices.
5. If A is non-singular matrix and A.B=0, then B is null matrix.
6. AB BA (in general) Commutative property does not hold
7. A(BC) = (AB)C Associative property holds
8. A(B+C) = AB AC Distributive property holds

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 4
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

9. AC = AD , doesn’t imply C = D ,even when A -.


10. If A, C, D be matrix, and if rank (A)= n & AC=AD, then C=D.
11. (A+B)T = A + B
12. (AB)T = B . A
13. (AB)-1 = B . A
14. AA =A A=I
15. (kA)T = k.A (k is scalar, A is vector)
16. (kA)-1 = . A (k is scalar , A is vector)
17. (A ) = (A )
18. (̅̅̅̅
A ) = (A ̅ ) (Conjugate of a transpose of matrix= Transpose of conjugate of matrix)
19. If a non-singular matrix A is symmetric, then A is also symmetric.
20. If A is a orthogonal matrix , then A and A are also orthogonal.

21. If A is a square matrix of order n then (i) |adj A|=|A|


(ii) |adj (adj A)|=|A|( )
(iii) adj (adj A) =|A| A

1.1.1.22 Elementary Transformation of a Matrix:


1. Interchange of any 2 lines
2. Multiplication of a line by a constant (e.g. k )
3. Addition of constant multiplication of any line to the another line (e. g. +p )

Note:
 Elementary transformations don’t change the ran of the matrix.
 However it changes the Eigen value of the matrix.

1.1.1.23 Rank of Matrix

If we select any r rows and r columns from any matrix A,deleting all other rows and columns,
then the determinant formed by these r r elements is called minor of A of order r.

Definition: A matrix is said to be of rank r when,


i) It has at least one non-zero minor of order r.
ii) Every minor of order higher than r vanishes.

Other definition: The rank is also defined as maximum number of linearly independent row
vectors.

Special case: Rank of Square matrix

Rank = Number of non-zero row in upper triangular matrix using elementary transformation.

Note:
1. r(A.B) min { r(A), r (B)}
2. r(A+B) r(A) + r (B)
3. r(A-B) r(A) - r (B)
4. The rank of a diagonal matrix is simply the number of non-zero elements in principal
diagonal.
5. A system of homogeneous equations such that the number of unknown variable exceeds
the number of equations, necessarily has non-zero solutions.
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 5
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

6. If A is a non-singular matrix, then all the row/column vectors are independent.


7. If A is a singular matrix, then vectors of A are linearly dependent.
8. r(A)=0 iff (if and only if) A is a null matrix.
9. If two matrices A and B have the same size and the same rank then A, B are equivalent
matrices.
10. Every non-singular matrix is row matrix and it is equivalent to identity matrix.

1.1.1.24 Solution of linear System of Equations:

For the following system of equations A X = B

a a a x
a a x
Where, A = , = , B =

[a a a ] [x ] [ ]

A= Coefficient Matrix, C = (A, B) = Augmented Matrix

r = rank (A), r = rank (C), n = Number of unknown variables (x , x , - - - x )

Consistency of a System of Equations:

For Non-Homogenous Equations (A X = B)


i) If r r , the equations are inconsistent i.e. there is no solution.
ii) If r = r = n, the equations are consistent and there is a unique solution.
iii) If r = r < n, the equations are consistent and there are infinite number of solutions.

For Homogenous Equations (A X = 0)


i) If r = n, the equations have only a trivial zero solution ( i.e. x = x = - - - x = 0).
ii) If r < n, then (n-r) linearly independent solution (i.e. infinite non-trivial solutions).

Note:

Consistent means: one or more solution (i.e. unique or infinite solution)

Inconsistent means: No solution

Cramer’s ule

Let the following two equations be there

a x +a x = b ---------------------------------------(i)

a x +a x = b ---------------------------------------(ii)
a a
D = |b b |

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 6
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

b a
D =| |
b a

a b
D =| |
a b

Solution using Cramer’s rule:

x = and x =

In the above method, it is assumed that


1. No of equations = No of unknowns
2. D 0

In general, for Non-Homogenous Equations


D 0 single solution (non trivial)
D = 0 infinite solution

For Homogenous Equations


D 0 trivial solutions ( x = x =………………………x = 0)
D = 0 non- trivial solution (or infinite solution)

Eigen Values & Eigen Vectors

1.1.1.25 Characteristic Equation and Eigen Values:

Characteristic equation: | A λ I |= 0, The roots of this equation are called the characteristic
roots /latent roots / Eigen values of the matrix A.

Eigen vectors: [ ]X=0

For each Eigen value λ, solving for X gives the corresponding Eigen vector.

Note: For a given Eigen value, there can be different Eigen vectors, but for same Eigen vector,
there can’t be different Eigen values.

Properties of Eigen values


1. The sum of the Eigen values of a matrix is equal to the sum of its principal diagonal.
2. The product of the Eigen values of a matrix is equal to its determinant.
3. The largest Eigen values of a matrix is always greater than or equal to any of the
diagonal elements of the matrix.
4. If λ is an Eigen value of orthogonal matrix, then 1/ λ is also its Eigen value.
5. If A is real, then its Eigen value is real or complex conjugate pair.
6. Matrix A and its transpose A has same characteristic root (Eigen values).
7. The Eigen values of triangular matrix are just the diagonal elements of the matrix.
8. Zero is the Eigen value of the matrix if and only if the matrix is singular.
9. Eigen values of a unitary matrix or orthogonal matrix has absolute value ‘1’.
10. Eigen values of Hermitian or symmetric matrix are purely real.
11. Eigen values of skew Hermitian or skew symmetric matrix is zero or pure imaginary.
| |
12. is an Eigen value of adj A (because adj A = |A|. A ).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 7
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

13. If λ is an Eigen value of the matrix then ,


i) Eigen value of A is 1/λ
ii) Eigen value of A is λ
iii) Eigen value of kA are λ (k is scalar)
iv) Eigen value of A I are λ + k
v) Eigen value of (A I)2 are ( )

Properties of Eigen Vectors


1) Eigen vector X of matrix A is not unique.
Let is Eigen vector, then C is also Eigen vector (C = scalar constant).
2) If λ , λ , λ . . . . . λ are distinct, then , . . . . . are linearly independent .
3) If two or more Eigen values are equal, it may or may not be possible to get linearly
independent Eigen vectors corresponding to equal roots.
4) Two Eigen vectors are called orthogonal vectors if T∙ = 0.
( , are column vector)
(Note: For a single vector to be orthogonal , A = A or, A. A = A. A =  )
5) Eigen vectors of a symmetric matrix corresponding to different Eigen values are
orthogonal.

Cayley Hamilton Theorem: Every square matrix satisfies its own characteristic equation.

1.1.1.26 Vector:

Any quantity having n components is called a vector of order n.

Linear Dependence of Vectors


 If one vector can be written as linear combination of others, the vector is linearly
dependent.

Linearly Independent Vectors


 If no vectors can be written as a linear combination of others, then they are linearly
independent.

Suppose the vectors are x x x x

Its linear combination is λ x + λ x + λ x + λ x = 0


 If λ , λ , λ , λ are not “all zero” they are linearly dependent.
 If all λ are zero they are linearly independent.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 8
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.2 Probability and Distribution

1.2.1 Probability

Event: Outcome of an experiment is called event.

Mutually Exclusive Events (Disjoint Events): Two events are called mutually exclusive, if the
occurrence of one excludes the occurrence of others i.e. both can’t occur simultaneously.

A B =φ, P(A B) =0

Equally Likely Events: If one of the events cannot happen in preference to other, then such events
are said to be equally likely.

Odds in Favour of an Event =

Where m no. of ways favourable to A

n no. of ways not favourable to A

Odds Against the Event =

.
Probability: P(A)= = .

P(A) P(A’)=1

Important points:
 P(A B) Probability of happening of “at least one” event of A & B
 P(A B) ) Probability of happening of “both” events of A & B
 If the events are certain to happen, then the probability is unity.
 If the events are impossible to happen, then the probability is zero.

Addition Law of Probability:


a. For every events A, B and C not mutually exclusive
P(A B C)= P(A)+ P(B)+ P(C)- P(A B)- P(B C)- P(C A)+ P(A B C)
b. For the event A, B and C which are mutually exclusive
P(A B C)= P(A)+ P(B)+ P(C)

Independent Events: Two events are said to be independent, if the occurrence of one does not
affect the occurrence of the other.

If P(A B)= P(A) P(B) Independent events A & B

Conditional Probability: If A and B are dependent events, then P. / denotes the probability of
occurrence of B when A has already occurred. This is known as conditional probability.
( )
P(B/A)= ( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 9
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

For independent events A & B P(B/A) = P(B)

Theorem of Combined Probability: If the probability of an event A happening as a result of trial is


P(A). Probability of an event B happening as a result of trial after A has happened is P(B/A) then
the probability of both the events A and B happening is

P(A B)= P(A). P(B/A), [ P(A) 0]

= P(B). P(A/B), [ P(B) 0]

This is also known as Multiplication Theorem.


For independent events A&B P(B/A) = P(B), P(A/B )= P(A)

Hence P(A B) = P(A) P(B)

Important Points:

If P & P are probabilities of two independent events then


1. P (1-P ) probability of first event happens and second fails (i.e only first happens)
2. (1-P )(1-P ) probability of both event fails
3. 1-(1-P )(1-P ) probability of at least one event occur
4. PP probability of both event occurs

Baye’s theorem:

An event A corresponds to a number of exhaustive events B , B ,.., B .

If P(B ) and P(A/B ) are given then,

( ). ( )
P. /=
( ). ( )

This is also known as theorem of Inverse Probability.

Random variable: Real variable associated with the outcome of a random experiment is called a
random variable.

1.2.2 Distribution

Probability Density Function (PDF) or Probability Mass Function:

The set of values Xi with their probabilities P constitute a probability distribution or probability
density function of the variable X. If f(x) is the PDF, then f(x ) = P( = x ) ,

PDF has the following properties:


 Probability density function is always positive i.e. f(x)
 ∫ f(x)dx = 1 (Continuous)
 f(x ) = 1 (Discrete)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 10
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Discrete Cumulative Distribution Function (CDF) or Distribution Function

The Cumulative Distribution Function F(x) of the discrete variable x is defined by,

F (x) = F(x) = P(X x) = P(x ) = f(x )

Continuous Cumulative Distribution function (CDF) or Distribution Function:

If F (x) = P(X x) =∫ f(x)dx, then F(x) is defined as the cumulative distribution function or
simply the distribution function of the continuous variable.

CDF has the following properties:


( )
i) = F (x) =f(x) 0
ii) 1 F (x) 0
iii) If x x then F (x ) F (x ) , i.e. CDF is monotone (non-decreasing function)
iv) F ( ) =0
v) F ( ) = 1
vi) P(a x b) =∫ f(x)dx = ∫ f(x)dx - ∫ f(x)dx = F (b) F (a)

Expectation [E(x)]:
1. E(X) = x f(x ) (Discrete case)
2. E(X) = ∫ x f(x )dx (Continuous case)

Properties of Expectation
1. E(constant) = constant
2. E(CX) = C . E(X) [C is constant]
3. E(AX+BY) = A E(X)+B E(Y) [A& B are constants]
4. E(XY)= E(X) E(Y/X)= E(Y) E(X/Y)

E(XY) E(X) E(Y) in general

But E(XY) = E(X) E(Y) , if X & Y are independent

Variance (Var(X))

Var (X) =E,(x ) ]

Var (X)= (x x ) f(xx ) (Discrete case)

Var (X)=∫ (xx ) f(x)dx (Continuous case)

Var (X) =E( )-,E(x)-

Properties of Variance
1. Var(constant) = 0
2. Var(Cx) = C Var(x) -Variance is non-linear [here C is constant]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 11
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

3. Var(Cx D) = C Var(x) -Variance is translational invariant [C & D are constants]


4. Var(x-k) = Var(x) [k is constant]
5. Var(ax+by) = a Var(x) + b Var(y) 2ab cov(x,y) (if not independent) [A & B are
constants]
= a Var(x) + b Var(y) (if independent)

Covariance

Cov (x,y)=E(xy)-E(x) E(y)

If independent covariance=0, E(xy) = E(x) . E(y)

(if covariance = 0, then the events are not necessarily independent)

Properties of Covariance
1. Cov(x,y) = Cov(y,x) (i.e. symmetric)
2. Cov(x,x) = Var(x)
3. |Cov(x,y)|

Standard Distribution Function (Discrete r.v. case):


1. Binomial Distribution : P(r) = C p q
Mean = np, Variance = npq, S.D. =√npq
2. Poisson Distribution: Probability of k success is P (k) =
no. of success trials , n no. of trials , P success case probability
mean of the distribution
For Poisson distribution: Mean = , variance = , and =np

Standard Distribution Function (Continuous r.v. case):


( )
1. Normal Distribution (Gaussian Distribution): f(x) = e

Where and are the mean and standard deviation respectively
 P( <x< ) = 68%
 P( <x< ) = 95.5%
 P( <x< ) = 99.7%
 Total area under the curve is is unity i.e. ∫ f(x)dx = 1
( )
 P(x1 < x < x2) = ∫ e dx = Area under the curve from x1 to x2

2. Exponential distribution : f(x) = λ e , x , here λ
= , x
3. Uniform distribution: f(x)= , b f(x) a
= , otherwise
4. Cauchy distribution : f(x)= .( )

5. Rayleigh distribution function : f(x) = e , x

Mean:
 For a set of n values of a variant X=( x , x , … . . , x )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 12
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

The arithmetic mean, ̅=


 For a grouped data if x , x , … . . , x are mid values of the class intervals having frequencies
f , f ,….., f ,then, ̅=
 If ̅ is mean for n data; ̅ is mean for n data; then combined mean of n +n data is
̅ ̅
̅=
 If ̅̅̅ , be mean and SD of a sample size n and m , be those for a sample of size n then
SD of combined sample of size n +n is given by,

(n n ) =n +n +n D +n D

D = m -m (m , = mean, SD of combined sample)

( n) = (n ) (n D )

Median: When the values in a data sample are arranged in descending order or ascending order
of magnitude the median is the middle term if the no. of sample is odd and is the mean of two
middle terms if the number is even.

Mode: It is defined as the value in the sampled data that occurs most frequently.

Important Points:
 Mean is best measurement ( all observations taken into consideration).
 Mode is worst measurement ( only maximum frequency is taken).
 In median, 50 % observation is taken.
 Sum of the deviation about “mean” is zero.
 Sum of the absolute deviations about “median” is minimum.
 Sum of the square of the deviations about “mean” is minimum.

Co-efficient of variation = ̅ 100

( , )
Correlation coefficient = (x,y) =
 -1 (x, y) 1
 (x,y) = (y,x)
 |(x,y)| = 1 when P(x=0)=1; or P(x=ay)=1 [ for some a]
 If the correlation coefficient is -ve, then two events are negatively correlated.
 If the correlation coefficient is zero, then two events are uncorrelated.
 If the correlation coefficient is +ve, then two events are positively correlated.

Line of Regression:

The equation of the line of regression of y on x is y y= ̅̅̅̅


(x x)

The equation of the line of Regression of x on y is (x x) = ̅̅̅̅


(y y)

̅̅̅̅
is called the regression coefficient of y on x and is denoted by byx.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 13
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

̅̅̅̅
is called the regression coefficient of x on y and is denoted by bxy.

Joint Probability Distribution: If X & Y are two random variables then Joint distribution is defined
as, Fxy(x,y) = P(X x ; Y y)

Properties of Joint Distribution Function/ Cumulative Distribution Function:


1. F ( , ) =
2. F ( , ) = 1
3. F ( , ) = { F ( , ) = P( y) = 0 x 1 = 0 }
4. F (x, ) = P( x ) = F (x) . 1 = F (x)
5. F ( , y) = F (y)

Joint Probability Density Function:

Defined as f(x, y) = F(x, y)


Property: ∫ ∫ f(x, y) dx dy = 1

Note: X and Y are said to be independent random variable

If fxy(x,y) = fx(x) . fy(y)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 14
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.3 Numerical Methods

1.3.1 Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equation / Root Finding :

Consider an equation f(x) = 0

1. Bisection method

This method finds the root between points “a” and “b”.

If f(x) is continuous between a and b and f (a) and f (b) are of opposite sign then there is a
root between a & b (Intermediate Value Theorem).

First approximation to the root is x1 = .

If f(x1) = 0, then x1 is the root of f(x) = 0, otherwise root lies between a and x1 or x1 and
b.

Similarly x2 and x3 . . . . . are determined.


 Simplest iterative method
 Bisection method always converge, but often slowly.
 This method can’t be used for finding the complex roots.
 Rate of convergence is linear

2. Newton Raphson Method (or Successive Substitution Method or Tangent Method)


( )
xn+1 = xn –
( )
 This method is commonly used for its simplicity and greater speed.
 Here f(x) is assumed to have continuous derivative f’(x).
 This method fails if f’(x) = .
 It has second order of convergence or quadratic convergence, i.e. the subsequent error at
each step is proportional to the square of the error at previous step.
 Sensitive to starting value, i.e. The Newton’s method converges provided the initial
approximation is chosen sufficiently close to the root.
 Rate of convergence is quadratic.

3. Secant Method
x =x ( )– ( )
f(x )

 Convergence is not guaranteed.


 If converges, convergence super linear (more rapid than linear, almost quadratic like
Newton Raphson, around 1.62).

4. Regula Falsi Method or (Method of False Position)

 Regula falsi method always converges.


 However, it converges slowly.
 If converges, order of convergence is between 1 & 2 (closer to 1).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 15
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

 It is superior to Bisection method.

Given f(x) = 0

Select x0 and x1 such that f(x0) f(x1) < 0 (i.e. opposite sign)

– ( )– ( )
x =x - ( ) ( )
, f(x ) = ( ) ( )

Check if f(x0) f(x2) < 0 or f(x1) f(x2) < 0

Compute x ………

which is an approximation to the root.

1.3.2 Solution of Linear System of Equations

1. Gauss Elimination Method

Here equations are converted into “upper triangular matrix” form, then solved by “bac
substitution” method.
Consider a1x + b1x + c1z = d1
a2x + b2x + c2z = d2
a3x + b3x + c3z = d3

Step 1: To eliminate x from second and third equation (we do this by subtracting suitable
multiple of first equation from second and third equation)
a1x + b1y + c1z = d1’ (pivotal equation, a1 pivot point.)
b ’y + c ’ z = d ’
b ’y + c ’ z = d ’

Step 2: Eliminate y from third equation


a1x + b1y + c1z = d1’
b ’y + c2z = d ’ (pivotal equation, b ’ is pivot point.)
c ’’z = d ”

Step 3: The value of x , y and z can be found by back substitution.

Note: Number of operations: N = +n -

2. Gauss Jordon Method


 Used to find inverse of the matrix and solving linear equations.
 Here back substitution is avoided by additional computations that reduce the matrix to
“diagonal from”, instead to triangular form in Gauss elimination method.
 Number of operations is more than Gauss elimination as the effort of back substitution
is saved at the cost of additional computation.
Step 1: Eliminate x from 2nd and 3rd

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 16
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Step 2: Eliminate y from 1st and 3rd


Step 3: Eliminate z from 1st and 2nd

3. L U Decomposition
It is modification of the Gauss eliminiation method.
Also Used for finding the inverse of the matrix.

[A]n x n = [ L ] n x n [U] n x n
a11 a12 a13 1 0 0 U11 U12 U13
a21 b22 c23 = L21 1 0 0 U22 U23
a31 b32 c33 L31 L32 1 0 0 U31

Ax = LUX = b can be written as


a)LY=b and b) UX=Y

Solve for from a) then solve for from b). This method is nown as Doolittle’s method.
 Similar methods are Crout’s method and Choles y methods.

4. Iterative Method

(i) Jacobi Iteration Method


a1x + b1y + c1z = d1
a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
a3x + b3y + c3z = d3

If a1, b2 , c3 are large compared to other coefficients, then solving these for x, y, z
respectively
x = k1 – l1y – m1z
y = k2 – l2x – m2z
z = k3 – l3x – m3y

Let us start with initial approximation x0 , y0 , z0


x1= k1 – l1y0 – m1z0
y1= k2 – l2y0 – m2z0
z1= k3 – l3y0 – m3z0

Note: No component of x(k) is used in computation unless y(k) and z(k) are computed.

The process is repeated till the difference between two consecutive approximations is
negligible.
In generalized form:
x(k+1) = k1 – l1 y(k) – m1z(k)
y(k+1) = k2 – l2 x(k) – m2z(k)
z(k+1) = k3 – l3 x(k) – m3y(k)

(ii) Gauss-Siedel Iteration Method

Modification of the Jacobi’s Iteration Method

Start with (x0, y0, z0) = (0, 0, 0) or anything [No specific condition]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 17
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

In first equation, put y = y0 z = z0 which will give x1


In second equation, put x = x1 and z = z0 which will give y1
In third equation, put x = x1 and y = y1 which will give z1

Note: To compute any variable, use the latest available value.


In generalized form:
x(k+1) = k1 – l1y(k) – m1z(k)
y(k+1) = k2 – l2x(k+1) – m2z(k)
z(k+1) = k3 – l3x(k+1) – m3y(k+1)

1.3.3 Numerical Integration

Trapezoidal Formula: Step size h =

h
∫ f(x)dx = *( first term last term) (remaining terms)+

Error = Exact - approximate

The error in approximating an integral using Trapezoidal rule is bounded by

h
(b a) max |f ( )|
1 , , -

Simpson’s One Third Rule (Simpson’s Rule):

h
∫ f(x)dx = *( first term last term) (all odd terms) (all even terms)+

The error in approximating an integral using Simpson’s one third rule is

h
(b a) max |f ( ) ( )|
1 , , -

Simpson’s Three Eighth Rule:

h ( first term last term) (all multiple of terms)


∫ f(x)dx = { }
(all remaining terms)

The error in approximating an integral using Simpson’s / rule is

(b a)
max |f ( ) ( )|
, , -

1.3.4 Solving Differential Equations


(i) Euler method (for first order differential equation )
Given equation is y = f(x, y); y(x0) = y0

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 18
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Solution is given by, Yn+1 = yn + h f(xn,yn)

(ii) Runge Kutta Method

Used for finding the y at a particular x without solving the 1st order differential equation
= f(x, y)
K1 = h f(x0, y0)
K2 = h f(x0 + , y0 + )
K3 = h f(x0 + , y0 + )
K4 = h f(x0 +h, y0 + k3)
K = (k1 + 2k2 + 2k3 + k4)
Y(x0+h) = y0 + k

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 19
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.4 Calculus

1.4.1 Limit of a Function

Let y = f(x)

Then lim f(x)= i.e, “ f(x) as x a” implies for any (>0), (>0) such that whenever
0< |x a|< , |f(x) |<

Some Standard Expansions

( ) n(n 1)(n )
(1 x) = 1 nx x .........x

x a
=x x a x a .........a
x a

e =1+x+ + .........

log(1 x) = x + .........

log(1 x) = x .........

Sin x = x .........

Cos x = 1 + .........

Sinh x = x .........

Cosh x = 1 + .........

Some Important Limits

sinx
lim =
x

1
lim (1 ) =
x

lim(1 x) =

a 1
lim = log a
x
e 1
lim =1
x

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 20
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

log(1 x)
lim =1
x
x a
lim = a
x a

lim log|x| =

L – Hospital’s ule
 When function is of or form, differentiate numerator & denominator and then apply
limit.

Existence of Limits and Continuity:


1. f(x) is defined at a, i.e, f(a) exists.
2. If lim f(x) = lim f(x) = L ,then the lim f(x) exists and equal to L.
3. If lim f(x) = lim f(x)= f(a) then the function f(x) is said to be continuous.

Properties of Continuity

If f and g are two continuous functions at a; then


a. (f+g), (f.g), (f-g) are continuous at a
b. is continuous at a, provided g(a) 0
c. |f| or |g| is continuous at a

olle’s theorem

If (i) f(x) is continuous in closed interval [a,b]

(ii) f’(x) exists for every value of x in open interval (a,b)

(iii) f(a) = f(b)

Then there exists at least one point c between (a, b) such that ( )=0

Geometrically: There exists at least one point c between (a, b) such that tangent at c is parallel to
x axis

C
C
2

C1

a b

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 21
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem

If (i) f(x) is continuous in the closed interval [a,b] and

(ii) f’(x) exists in the open interval (a,b), then atleast one value c of x exist in (a,b) such that
( ) ( )
= f (c).

Geometrically, it means that at point c, tangent is parallel to the chord line.

Cauchy’s Mean Value Theorem

If (i) f(x) is continuous in the closed interval [a,a+h] and

(ii) f (x) exists in the open interval (a,a+h), then there is at least one number (0< <1)
such that

f(a+h) = f(a) + h f(a+ h)

Let f1 and f2 be two functions:


i) f1,f2 both are continuous in [a,b]
ii) f1, f2 both are differentiable in (a,b)
iii) f2’ 0 in (a,b)

then, for a b

( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
= ( )

1.4.2 Derivative:
( ) ( )
’( ) = lim

Provided the limit exists ’( ) is called the rate of change of f at x.

Algebra of derivative:-
i. (f g) = f g
ii. (f g) = f – g
iii. (f. g) = f . g f .g
. .
iv. (f/g) =

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 22
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Homogenous Function

Any function f(x, y) which can be expressed in from xn . / is called homogenous function of
order n in x and y. (Every term is of nth degree.)

f(x,y) = a0xn + a1xn-1y + a2xn-2y2 ………… an yn

f(x,y) = xn . /

Euler’s Theorem on Homogenous Function

If u be a homogenous function of order n in x and y then,


 x +y = nu

 x + 2xy +y = n(n 1)u

1.4.3 Total Derivative

If u=f(x,y) ,x=φ(t), y=Ψ(t)

= . + .

u= x+ y

Monotonicity of a Function f(x)


1. f(x) is increasing function if for , f( ) f( )
Necessary and sufficient condition, f’ (x)
2. f(x) is decreasing function if for , , f( ) f( )
Necessary and sufficient condition, f (x)

Note: If f is a monotonic function on a domain ‘D’ then f is one-one on D.

Maxima-Minima

a) Global b) Local

Rule for finding maxima & minima:


 If maximum or minimum value of f(x) is to be found, let y = f(x)
 Find dy/dx and equate it to zero and from this find the values of x, say x is , , …(called the
critical points).
 Find at x = ,
If , y has a minimum value
If ,y has a maximum value

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 23
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

If = , proceed further and find at x = .


If , y has neither maximum nor minimum value at x =
But If = , proceed further and find at x = .
If , y has minimum value
If , y has maximum value
If = , proceed further

Note: Greatest / least value exists either at critical point or at the end point of interval.
Point of Inflexion
If at a point, the following conditions are met, then such point is called point of inflexion

Point of
inflexion

i) = ,
ii) =0,
iii)  Neither minima nor maxima exists

Taylor Series:

f(a h)= f(a) h f’(a) f”(a) .........

Maclaurian Series:

h
f(x) = f( ) x f’( ) f ( ) f ( )

Maxima & Minima (Two variables)

r= ,s= , t=

1. = 0, = solve these equations. Let the solution be (a, b), (c, d)…
2. (i) if rt s and r maximum at (a, b)
(ii) if rt s and r minimum at (a, b)
(iii) if rt s < 0 at (a, b), f(a,b) is not an extreme value i.e, f(a, b) is saddle point.
(iv) if rt s > 0 at (a, b), It is doubtful, need further investigation.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 24
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.4.4 Standard Integral Results


1. ∫ x dx = , n 1
2. ∫ dx = log x
3. ∫ e dx = e
4. ∫ a dx = (prove it )
5. ∫ cos x dx = sin x
6. ∫ sin x dx = cos x
7. ∫ sec x dx = tan x
8. ∫ cosec x dx = cot x
9. ∫ sec x tan x dx = sec x
10. ∫ cosec x cot x dx = cosec x
11. ∫ dx = sin

12. ∫ dx = sec

13. ∫ dx = sec x

14. ∫ cosh x dx = sinh x
15. ∫ sinh x dx = cosh x
16. ∫ sech x dx = tanh x
17. ∫ cosech x dx = coth x
18. ∫ sech x tanh x dx = sech x
19. ∫ cosec h x cot h x dx = cosech x
20. ∫ tan x dx = log sec x
21. ∫ cot x dx = log sin x
22. ∫ sec x dx = log( sec x tan x) = log tan( ⁄ x⁄ )
23. ∫ cosec x dx = log(cosec x cot x) = log tan
24. ∫ dx = log(x √x a ) = cosh ( )

25. ∫ dx = log(x √x a ) = sinh ( )


26. ∫ √a x dx = sin
27. ∫ √a x dx = √x a log(x √x a )
28. ∫ √x a dx = √x a log(x √x a )
29. ∫ dx = tan
30. ∫ dx = log ( ) where x <a
31. ∫ dx = log ( ) where x > a
32. ∫ sin x dx = sin x
33. ∫ cos x dx = sin x
34. ∫ tan x dx = tan x x
35. ∫ cot x dx = cot x x
36. ∫ ln x dx = x ln x x
37. ∫ e sin bx dx = (a sin bx b cos bx )
38. ∫ e cos bx dx = (a cos bx b sin bx )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 25
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

39. ∫ e ,f(x) f (x)-dx = e f(x)


Integration by parts: ∫ u v dx = u. ∫ v dx ∫( ∫ v dx)dx

Selection of U & V I L A T E
E

Inverse circular
(e.g. tan 1 x) Exponential
Logarithmic Algebraic Trigonometric
Note: Take that function as “u” which comes first in “ILATE”

1.4.5 Rules for Definite Integral


1. ∫ f(x)dx =∫ f(x)dx+∫ f(x)dx a<c<b
2. ∫ f(x)dx =∫ f(a b x)dx ∫ f(x)dx =∫ f(a x)dx
/ / /
3. ∫ f(x)dx =∫ f(x)dx+∫ f(a x)dx ∫ f(x)dx = ∫ f(x)dx
if f(a-x)=f(x)
=0 if f(a-x)=-f(x)
4. ∫ f(x)dx =2 ∫ f(x)dx if f(-x) = f(x), even function
=0 if f(x) = -f(x), odd function

Improper Integral

Those integrals for which limit is infinite or integrand is infinite in a x b in case of ∫ f(x)dx,
then it is called as improper integral.

1.4.6 Convergence:
 ∫ f(x)dx is said to be convergent if the value of the integral is finite.
 If (i) f(x) g(x) for all x and (ii) ∫ g(x)dx converges , then ∫ f(x)dx also converges
 If (i) f(x) g(x) for all x and (ii) ∫ g(x)dx diverges, then ∫ f(x)dx also diverges
( )
 If lim ( )
= c where c 0, then both integrals ∫ f(x)dx and ∫ g(x)dx converge or both
diverge.
 ∫ is converges when p 1 and diverges when p 1
 ∫ e dx and ∫ e dx is converges for any constant p and diverges for p
 The integral ∫ ( )
is convergent if and only if p 1
 The integral ∫ ( )
is convergent if and only if p 1

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 26
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.4.7 Vector Calculus:

Scalar Point Function:

If corresponding to each point P of region R there is a corresponding scalar then (P) is said to
be a scalar point function for the region R.

(P)= (x,y,z)

Vector Point Function:

If corresponding to each point P of region R, there corresponds a vector defined by F(P) then F is
called a vector point function for region R.

F(P) = F(x,y,z) = f1(x,y,z) ̂ +f2(x,y,z)ĵ f3(x,y,z) ̂

Vector Differential Operator or Del Operator: =. ĵ ̂ /

Directional Derivative:

⃗⃗ is the resolved part of f in direction N


The directional derivative of f in a direction N ⃗⃗ .

⃗⃗ = | f|cos
f. N

Where ⃗N
⃗ is a unit vector in a particular direction.

Direction cosine: l m n =1

Where, l =cos , m=cos , n=cos ,

1.4.8 Gradient:

The vector function f is defined as the gradient of the scalar point function f(x,y,z) and written
as grad f.

grad f = f = î ĵ +̂

 f is vector function
 If f(x,y,z) = 0 is any surface, then f is a vector normal to the surface f and has a
magnitude equal to rate of change of f along this normal.
 Directional derivative of f(x,y,z) is maximum along f and magnitude of this maximum
is | f|.

1.4.9 Divergence:

The divergence of a continuously differentiable vector point function F is denoted by div. F and
is defined by the equation.

div. F = . F

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 27
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

F=f + ĵ Ψ̂

div.F= . f = . ĵ ̂ / .( f + ĵ Ψ̂)

= + +

 . f is scalar
 . = is Laplacian operator

1.4.10 Curl:

The curl of a continuously differentiable vector point function F is denoted by curl F and is
defined by the equation.

ĵ ̂
Curl F = f =| |
f φ Ψ

F is vector function

1.4.11 Solenoidal Vector Function

If .A = 0 , then A is called as solenoidal vector function.

1.4.12 Irrotational Vector Function

If A =0, then A is said to be irrotational otherwise rotational.

1.4.13 DEL Applied Twice to Point Functions:

1. div grad f = f= + + ---------- this is Laplace equation


2. curl grad f = f=0
3. div curl F = . F =0
4. curl curl F = ( f) = ( . f) - F
5. grad div F = ( . f)= ( F) + F

1.4.14 Vector Identities:

f, g are scalar functions & F, G are vector functions


1. (f g) = f + g
2. . (F G) = . F .G
3. (F G) = F G
4. (fg) = f g + g f
5. . (fG)= f. G f. G
6. (fG) = f G f G
7. (F. G) = F ( G) G ( F)
8. . (F G) = G.( F) F. ( G)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 28
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

9. (F G) = F( G) G( F)

Also note:

1. (f/g)= (g f – f g)/g
2. (F.G)’ = F’.G F . G’
3. (F G)’ = F’ G + F G’
4. (fg) = g f + 2 f. g + f g

1.4.15 Vector product

1. Dot product of A B with C is called scalar triplet product and denoted as [ABC]
Rule: For evaluating the scalar triplet product
(i) Independent of position of dot and cross
(ii) Dependent on the cyclic order of the vector
[ABC] = A B. C = A. B C
= B C. A= B.C A
= C A. B = C.A B
A B. C = -(B A. C)
⃗ B
2. (A ⃗) C ⃗ = (extreme adjacent) Outer
= (Outer. extreme) adjacent (Outer. adjacent) extreme
 (A ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗
B) ⃗ = (C
C ⃗ .A ⃗ )B ⃗ .B
⃗ - (C ⃗
⃗ )A
 A ⃗ (B ⃗ C ⃗ ) = (A⃗ .C⃗ )B ⃗ .B
⃗ - (A ⃗
⃗ )C
⃗ ⃗
 (A B ) C A (B C ) ⃗ ⃗ ⃗ ⃗

1.4.16 Line Integral, Surface Integral & Volume Integral

 Line integral = ∫ F( )d
If F( )= f(x,y,z) ĵ (x,y,z) + ̂ Ψ(x,y,z)
d = dx ĵ dy ̂ dz
∫ F( )d = ∫ ( f dx dy Ψ dz )
 Surface integral: ∫ ⃗F . ⃗⃗⃗⃗
ds or ∫ ⃗F . ⃗N
⃗ ds, Where N is unit outward normal to Surface.
 Volume integral : ∫ F dv

If F(R ) = f(x,y,z)î + (x,y,z)ĵ Ψ (x,y,z) ̂ and v = x y z , then

∫ F dv = î∫ ∫ ∫ fdxdydz ĵ ∫ ∫ ∫ dxdydz + ̂ ∫ ∫ ∫ Ψdxdydz

1.4.17 Green’s Theorem

If R be a closed region in the xy plane bounded by a simple closed curve c and if P and Q are
continuous functions of x and y having continuous derivative in , then according to Green’s
theorem.

∮ (P dx dy) = ∫ ∫ . / dxdy

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 29
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.4.18 Sto e’s theorem

If F be continuously differentiable vector function in R, then ∮ F. dr = ∫ F .N ds

1.4.19 Gauss divergence theorem

The normal surface integral of a vector point function F which is continuously differentiable over
the boundary of a closed region is equal to the

∫ F .N.ds =∫ div F dv

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 30
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.5: Differential Equations

1.5.1 Order of Differential Equation: It is the order of the highest derivative appearing in it.

1.5.2 Degree of Differential Equation: It is the degree of the highest derivative occurring in it,
after expressing the equation free from radicals and fractions as far as derivatives are
concerned.

1.5.3 Differential Equations of First Order First Degree:

Equations of first order and first degree can be expressed in the form f (x, y, y ) = or
y = f(x, y). Following are the different ways of solving equations of first order and first degree:

1. Variable separable : f(x)dx + g(y)dy = 0

∫ f(x)dx ∫ g(y)dy = c is the solution


( , )
2. Homogenous Equation: = ( , )
 To solve a homogeneous equation, substitute y = Vx

=V+x

 Separate the variable V and x and integrate.

Equations Reducible to Homogenous Equation:

The differential equation: =

This is a non - homogeneous but can be converted to homogeneous equation

Case I: If

Substitute x = X + h y=Y+k (h and K are constants)

Solve for h and k


ah b c=0
ah b c =0

Case II: If =

= = (say)

( )
= ( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 31
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Substitute ax +by = t, so that,


( )
= a

Solve by variable separable method.

3. Linear Equations:

The standard form of a linear equation of first order:

+ P(x) y = Q(x) , where P and Q are functions of x

d y dy
Second order linear equation: P(x) (x)y = (x)
dx dx

Commonly nown as “Leibnitz’s linear equations”

Integrating factor, I.F. = e∫

ye∫ = ∫ . (I. F)dx C y(I. F. ) = ∫ . (I. F)dx C

Note: The degree of every linear differential equation is always one but if the degree of the
differential equation is one then it need not be linear.

Ex: x . / y = 0.

.1 Bernoulli’s Equation:

+Py=Qy where, P & Q are functions of x only.

Divide by y

y Py =Q

Substitute, y =z

(1 n)Pz = Q (1-n) This is a linear equation and can be solved easily

4. Exact Differential Equations:

M (x, y) dx + N (x, y) dy = 0

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 32
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

The necessary and sufficient condition for the differential equations M dx +N dy = 0 to be


exact is =

Solution of exact differential equation: ∫ M dx ∫(terms of N not contaning x ) dy = C

4.1 Equation Reducible the Exact Equation:

Integrating Factor:

Sometimes an equation which is not exact may become so on multiplication by some


function known as Integrating factor (I.F.).

Rule 0: Finding by inspection

1. x dy + y dx = d (x y)
2. =d( )
3. = d [log ( )]
4. =-d( )
5. = d [tan ( )-
6. =d[ log( )-

Rule 1: when M dx + N dy = 0 is homogenous in x and y and M x + N y 0 then I.F. =

Rule 2: If the equation f (x, y) y dx + f (x, y) x dy = 0 and M x – N y 0 then I.F. =

( )
Rule 3: If the M dx + N dy = 0 and . / = f(x), then I.F. = e∫

( )
Rule 4: If the equation M dx + N dy = 0 and . / = f(y) , then I.F. = e∫

1.5.4 Linear Differential Equation with Constant Coefficients:

------- y=X

The equation can be written as (D D ----- )y = X {Where, D = }

f(D) y = X ; f(D) = 0 is called Auxiliary Equation.

Rules for Finding Complimentary Function:

Case I : If all the roots of A.E. are real and different

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 33
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

(D m ) (D m ) - - - - - - (D m )y=0

So, the solution is: y = C e C e -- - - - -+ C e

Case II: If two roots are equal i.e. m = m

y = (C C x)e

Similarly, if m = m = m

y = (C C x +C x ) e

Case III: If one pair of roots are imaginary

i.e. m = i , m = i

y = e (C cos x C sin x)

Case IV: If two pairs of root are imaginary

i.e. repeated imaginary root i , i

y=e ,(C x C ) cos x (C x C ) sin x ]

1.5.5 Rules for finding Particular Integral

P.. = X= ( )
.X

Case I:

When X =

P.I. = put D = a [ ( ) 0]
( )

P.I. = x ( )
put D = a [ ’( ) 0, ( ) = 0]

P.I. = ( )
put D = a [ ( ) = 0, ’( ) = 0, ’’( ) 0]

Case II:

When X = sin (ax + b) or cos (ax +b)

P.I. = ( ) put =- , (- ) 0]
( )

=x ( )
( ) put =- , ’(- ) , (- ) = 0]

= ( )
( ) put =- , ’’(- ) , ’(- )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 34
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

= , (- ) = 0]
Case III:
When X = , m being positive integer
P.I. = ( )
= [ ( )-

= (D) ,1 ( )
-

= (D) [1 ( ) ( ) ( ) -
Case IV:
When X = V where V is function of x
P. I. = ( )
V

= ( )
V then evaluate ( )
V as in Case I, II & III

Case V:

When X = x V(x)

( )
P.I. = x V(x) = 0 1 V(x)
( ) ( ) ( )

Case VI:

When X is any other function of x

P.I. = ( )
X

Factorize f(D) = (D ) (D ) - - - - - - - (D ) and resolve ( )


into partial fractions
and then apply, X= ∫ on each terms.

Complete Solution: y = C.F. + P..

1.5.6 Cauchy-Euler Equation: (Homogenous Linear Equation)

. ------ - =X

Substitute x=e

x = Dy

= D (D-1) y

= D (D-1)(D-2) y

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 35
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

After substituting these differentials, the Cauchy – Euler equation results in a linear equation
with constant coefficients.

1.5.7 Legendre’s Linear Equation:

( ) ( ) - - - - -- - =X

ax + b = t = ln (ax + b)

(ax + b) =aDy

( ) = D(D-1)y

( ) = D(D-1)(D-2)y

After substituting these differentials, the Legendre’s equation results in a linear equation with
constant coefficients.

1.5.8 Partial Differential Equation:

z = f(x, y)

=p, =q, = r, = s, =

1.5.9 Homogenous Linear Equation with Constant Coefficients:

------ - = f( x, y) this is called homogenous because all


terms containing derivative is of same order.

( ------- ) = f(x, y) { where D = and D’ = }

f (D, D’) = f(x,y)

Step I: Finding the C.F.

1. Write A.E.
----- = 0,
Where m = and the roots are , ---- -
2. CF = (y + x) + (y + x) + - - - - - - , are distinct
CF = (y + x) + x (y + x) + (y + x) + - - - - - - , , two equal roots.

CF = (y + x) + x (y + x) + (y + x) + - - - - , , three equal roots.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 36
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

Step II: Finding P.I.

P.. = f (x, y)
( , )

1. when F( ax +by ) = , put [ D = a, = b]


2. when F( x, y) = sin (mx +ny), put ( = , = , = )
3. when F(x, y) = , P. = ( , ) =[ ( , )-
4. when F(x, y) is any function of x and y. P. = ( , )
f (x, y) , resolve ( , )
into partial
fractions considering ( , ) as a function of D alone and operate each partial fraction
on f(x, y) remembering that f(x, y) = ∫ ( , ) where c, is replaced by
( )
y + mx after integration.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 37
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.6: Complex Variables

= is a complex no., where x & y are real numbers called as real and imaginary part of z.

Modulus or absolute value = | | = √ , Argument of = = ( )= . /

1.6.1 Function of a Complex Variable: It is a rule by means of which it is possible to find one or
more complex numbers ‘w’ for every value of ‘z’ in a certain domain D, then w = f (z)

Where z = x + iy,

w = f (z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y)

1.6.2 Continuity of f (z):

 A function = f (z) is said to be continuous at = if ( ) = ( ).


 Further f (z) is said to be continuous in any region R of the z-plane, if it is continuous at
every point of that region.
 Also if w = f (z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y) is continuous at = , then u(x, y) and v(x, y) are also
continuous at x= & y = .

1.6.3 Theorem on Differentiability:

The necessary and sufficient conditions for the derivative of the function f( ) to exist for all
values of in a region R.

i) , , , , are continuous functions of x and y in R.

ii) = , = , Cauchy-Riemann equations (CR equations)

1.6.4 Analytic Functions (or Regular Function) or Holomorphic Functions

 A single valued function which is defined and differentiable at each point of a domain D is
said to be analytic in that domain.
 A point at which an analytic function ceases to possess a derivative is called Singular point.
 Thus if u and v are real Single – valued functions of x and y such that , , , are
continuous throughout a region R , then CR equations

= , =-

are both “necessary and sufficient” condition for the function f(z) = u iv to be analytic in .

 Real and imaginary part i.e. u, v of the function is called conjugate function.
 An analytic function posses derivatives of all order and these are themselves analytic.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 38
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.6.5 Harmonic Functions:

If f(z) = u + iv be an analytic function in some region of the z – plane then the C –R equations are
satisfied.

= , =

Differentiating with respect to x and y respectively,

= , =

=0 (Laplace Equation)

Note:

(1) For a function to be regular, the first order partial derivations of u and v must be
continuous in addition to CR equations.
(2) Mean value of any harmonic function over a circle is equal to the value of the function at
the centre.

1.6.6 Methods of Constructing Analytic Functions:

1. If the real part of a function is given then,


’( ) = -i
Integrate with points at (z, 0)
f(z) = ∫ . / dz - i ∫ . / dz + c
( , ) ( , )
Similarly in case v(x, y) is known, then
f’ (z) = +i
f (z) = ∫ . / dz + i ∫ . / dz + c
( , ) ( , )

2. If u (x, y) is known, then to find v(x, y) we have


dv = dx + dy
dv = dx + dy
Integrate this equation to find v.
f (z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y)
3. If a real part of the analytic function f(z) is given which is harmonic function u (x, y), then
f(z) = 2u . , / - u(0, 0)

1.6.7 Complex Integration


 Line integral = ∫ ( ) , C need not be closed path
Here, f(z) = integrand , curve C = path of integration
 Contour integral = ∮ ( ) , if C is closed path

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 39
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

If f(z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y) and dz = dx + i dy

∫ ( ) =∫( ) ∫( )

Theorem: f(z) is analytic in a simple connected domain then ∫ ( ) = f( ) ( ), i.e.

integration is independent of the path

Dependence on Path: In general “Complex line integration” depends not only on the end points
but also on the path (however analytic function in simple connected domain is independent of
path.)

1.6.8 Cauchy’s Integral Theorem:

If f(z) is analytic in a simple connected domain D, then for every simple closed path C in D,
∮𝐶 𝑓(𝑧)𝑑𝑧 = 0

Note: In other words, by Cauchy’s theorem if f(z) is analytic on a simple closed path C and
everywhere inside C (with no exception, not even a single point) then ∮ ( ) =

1.6.8.1 Cauchy’s Integral Formula:

If f(z) is analytic within and on a closed curve and if a is any point within C, then
( )
( )= ∫

( )
’( ) = ∫ ( )

( )
”( ) = ∫ ( )

. . .
( )
( )= ∫ ( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 40
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

1.6.9 Morera’s Theorem: If f(z) is continuous in a region and ∫ ( ) = 0 around every


simple closed C then f(z) is analytic in that region.

1.6.10 Taylor’s Series: If f(z) is analytic inside a circle C with centre at a then for z inside C
( )
f(z) = f(a) f’(a) (z-a) + (z-a) + - - - - - - -

f(z) = ( )
( )
where = ∫ ( )

Other form, put z = a + h

f(a+h) = f(a) + h ’( ) + ”( ) + - - - - - - -

1.6.11 Laurent’s Series: If f(z) is analytic in the ring shaped region R bounded by two concentric
circles and of radii and ( ) and with centre at a then for all z in R

f(z) = ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( )
where, = ∫ ( )

If f(z) is analytic inside the curve then = and Laurent series reduces to Taylor’s series.

1.6.12 Zeroes of Analytic Function:

The value of z for which f(z) = 0

If f(z) is analytic in the neighbourhood of a point z = a then by Taylor’s theorem.

f(z) = ( ) ( ) ( )

= ( )

( )
where =

if = = =------ = 0, then f(z) is said to have a zero of order n at z =a.

1.6.13 Singularities of an Analytic Function:

A “singular point” of a function as the point at which the function ceases to be analytic.

1. Isolated Singularity: If z =a is a singularity of f(z) such that f(z) is analytic at each point in its
neighbourhood (i.e. there exists a circle with centre a which has no other singularity 1, then
z =a is called an isolated singularity).

2. Removable Singularity: If all the negative powers of (z-a) in Laurent series are zero then

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 41
Quick Refresher Guide Mathematics

f(z) = ( )
singularity can be removed by defining f(z) at z = a is such a way that it becomes analytic at
z =a
( ) exists finitely, then z = a is a removable singularity.
Example: f(z) = , then z = 0 is a removable singularity.

3. Essential singularity: If the numbers of negative power of (z-a) in Laurent’s series is infinite,
then z =a is called an essential singularity.
( ) does not exist in this case

4. Poles: If all the negative power of (z-a) in Laurent’s series after are missing then. The
singularity at z = a is called a pole of order n.
A pole of first order is called a “simple pole”.

1.6.14 Residue Theorem


If f(z) is analytic in and on a closed curve C except at a finite number of singular point within C
then
∫ f(z)dz = i (sum of the residue at the singular point within C)

Calculation of Residues

1. If f(x) has a simple pole at z=a , then


Res f(a) = ,( ) ( )-
( )
2. If ( ) = ( ) where ( ) = ( ) ( ), ( ) 𝑎
( )
C
Res ( ) = 𝐶 𝐶
( ) 𝑎
3. If ( ) has a pole of order n at z=a , then 𝐶 𝐶
( )=( )
2 ,( ) ( )-3
Here n =order of singularity

Note: If an analytic function has singularities at a finite number of points, then the sum of
residues at these points along with infinity is zero.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 42
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Part – 2: Network Theory


2.1: Network Solution Methodology

Voltage – current relation of network elements

Table. Voltage –Current relation of network elements

SL. Circuit Symbol in Units Voltage – Instantaneous Energy stored /


No element electric circuit current power , P = Vi dissipated
relation in [ ]

1 Resistance, R i V= i R i (t t )
V Ohm ( ohm’s law) i
()

2 Inductance, L i
Henry V=L Li
V L( i i )
(H)

3 Capacitance, C i
V Farad i=C Cv C( v v )
(F)

Series and parallel connection of circuit elements

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 43
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

L L L L
L =L L L

L
L =
L

C C C C

C
C C C C
C

C
C

Fig. Series and parallel connection of circuit elements

Kirchoff ’s Current Law (KCL)

The algebraic sum of currents at a node in an electrical circuit is equal to zero.

Kirchoff ’s Voltage Law (KVL)

In any closed loop electrical circuit, the algebraic sum of voltage drops across all the circuit
elements is equal to EMF rise in the same.

Mesh Analysis
In the mesh analysis, a current is assigned to each window of the network such that the currents
complete a closed loop. They are also referred to as loop currents. Each element and branch
therefore will have an independent current. When a branch has two of the mesh currents, the
actual current is given by their algebraic sum. Once the currents are assigned, Kirchhoff’s voltage
law is written for each of the loops to obtain the necessary simultaneous equations. The
simultaneous equations obtained can be solved using matrix inversion method or crammer’s
rule.

Mesh Analysis (using super mesh)

When two of the loops have a common element as a current source, mesh analysis is not applied
to both loops separately. Instead both the loops are merged and a super mesh is formed. Now
KVL is applied to super mesh.

Nodal Analysis

Typically, electrical networks contain several nodes, where some are simple nodes and some are
principal nodes. In the node voltage method, one of the principal nodes is selected as the
reference and equations based on KCL are written at the other principal nodes with respect to
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 44
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

the reference node. At each of these other principal nodes, a voltage is assigned, where it is
understood that this voltage is with respect to the reference node. These voltage are the
unknowns and are determined by nodal Analysis. When the node voltages to be found by nodal
analysis are more than one, the node voltages can be found from simultaneous equations by
matrix inversion method or Cramer’s rule

Nodal analysis (including super node)


When two of the nodes have a common element as a voltage source, nodal analysis is not applied
to both the nodes separately. Instead both the nodes are merged and a super node is formed.
Now KCL is applied to super node.

Voltage /Current Source

Ideal vs. Practical voltage source

Fig. Practical Voltage Source

Here E is the EMF of source and is the internal resistance of the source. For an ideal source,
is zero and for a practical source, is finite and small.

Ideal vs. Practical current source

Fig. Practical Current Source

Here I is the current of source and is internal resistance of source. For an ideal current source,
is infinite and for a practical source, is finite and large.

Dependent Sources

A source is called dependent if voltage / current of the source depends on voltage / current in
some other part of the network. Depending upon the nature of the source, dependent sources
can be classified as below.

 Voltage Controlled Voltage Source (VCVS )


 Voltage Controlled Current Source (VCCS)
 Current Controlled Voltage Source (CCVS)
 Current Controlled Current Source (CCCS)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 45
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Superposition theorem
In a linear bilateral network, the current through or voltage across any element is equal to
algebraic sum of currents through (or voltages across) the elements when each of the
independent sources are acting alone, provided each of the independent sources are replaced by
corresponding internal resistances.
Source conversion theorem
Source conversion theorem states that a voltage source, E in series with resistance, as seen
from terminals a and b is equivalent to a current source, I = E/ in parallel with resistance, .

A A

E ⁄

b B
B
Fig. Source conversion theorem

Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorems b


Any linear/bilateral network as viewed from terminals A and B can be replaced by a voltage
source in series with resistance. The theorem is mainly helpful to draw the load characteristics
(output voltage v/s output current as load resistance is varied).

A A

N /W

B
B
Fig Demonstration of Thevenin’s Theorem

In the figure shown above, V is Thevenin’s voltage as viewed from terminal A & B and is
Thevenin’s resistance as viewed from terminals A & B

Norton’s Theorem
Any linear / bilateral network, as viewed from terminals A and B, can be replaced by a current
source in parallel with resistance When source conversion theorem is applied for a Thevenin’s
equivalent circuit, Norton equivalent circuit is obtained and vice versa.
Let I = Norton current as between terminals A & B and
= Norton Resistance as viewed from terminals A & B
A
A

N/W

B
B
Fig Demonstration of Norton’s Theorem

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 46
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Evaluation of Thevenin’s / Norton’s equivalent circuit

Let V open- circuit voltage between terminals A & B,


I = short – circuit current between terminals A &B,
R = Resistance as viewed from terminals A & B,

Table Evaluating of Thevenin’s and Norton’s equivalent circuits


S. Quantity to be Circuit containing Circuit containing Circuit
No evaluated independent both independent containing
sources only and dependent dependent
sources sources only

1 V V V 0

2 I I I 0

V
3 R V I
I

Where V is the voltage for a current source, I between the terminals A and B.

Maximum power transfer theorem (as applied to dc network)

Maximum power transfer theorem in a dc network states a condition on load resistance for
which the maximum power is transferred to the load resistance. In a dc network, maximum
power is transferred to the load when the load resistance is equal to Thevenin’s ( / Norton’s)
resistance as viewed from load terminals.

R AI
A

N/W E

B
B
Fig. Demonstration of maximum power transfer theorem

For maximum power transfer,


Also, P and I =
Total power consumed in the circuit =

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 47
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Star-Delta transformation

A
A

B C B C

Fig. Star(Y) – Delta( ) transformation

( )
; ( )
; ( )

( ) ( ) ( )
;

McMillan Theorem

McMillan theorem can be applied to the circuits of the form shown and is based on nodal
analysis.

V= ( ∑ E ∑ I ) (∑ )

I I

E E

Fig. Mcmillan Theorem

Substitution theorem

Substitution theorem can be used to get incremental change in voltage/current of any circuit
element when a resistance R is changed by R and the same can be found by inserting a voltage
source – I in series with R.
I -I
N/W
N/W R R

Fig. Demonstration of substitution theorem

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 48
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Reciprocity theorem

Reciprocity theorem states that in a linear bilateral network, voltage source and current sink can
be interchanged.

I KI
+
V N/W N/W KV
V

Fig. Demonstration of reciprocity theorem

Following are the conditions to be satisfied to apply reciprocity theorem

 Only one source is present


 No dependent sources are present
 No initial conditions ( zero state )

Circuit which satisfies above conditions is called “ eciprocity network”

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 49
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

2.2: Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to dc Input


Transient response analysis of network elements

Transient analysis of a resistive circuit

Any change in voltage across a resistor at any instant t is instantaneously felt as corresponding
change in current at the same instant t. Consider the circuit below in which S is moved from
position 1 to 2 at t = 0.

1 t =0 2

S
+ V V
V
-

Fig. Transient analysis in resistive circuit

V⁄
V ( ) =V ; V ( ) = V and I ( ) = ; I ( ) =

V ( ) V ( ) and I ( ) I ( )

Resistor allows abrupt changes in voltage and current.

Transient response of inductor

+ (t) _

(t) L
Fig. Symbol of inductor
The voltage across and current through an inductor are related by following equation
V (t) = L & i (t) ∫ V (t)dt ∫ V (t)dt i ( )

Also inductor doesn’t allow abrupt change in current and for a abrupt change in current inductor
requires infinite voltage to be applied across it. Also at steady state, inductor acts as short.
i (t ) i (t ) at every instant t

Transient response of Capacitor

i C

Fig. Symbol of Capacitor

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 50
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

The voltage across or current through a capacitor are related by,

i (t) C and V = ∫ i (t)dt = ∫ i (t)dt V ( )

The voltage across a capacitor cannot change instantaneously unless infinite current (impulse)
is passed through it Hence capacitor doesn’t allow abrupt change in voltage across it Also at
steady state, capacitor acts as open.

v (t ) v (t ) at every instant t
Transient response of a R-L circuit
Consider the R- L circuit shown below, in which switch S is moved from position 1 to 2 at t= 0.

1 t =0 2

S
+
()
-
 V V
+
()
-

Fig. R-L circuit

( ) = ( )= ;V ( ) = 0; V ( ) = V ( ) V V V V

As V ( ) V ( ), inductor allows abrupt change in voltage. Also, ( ) = ( ) as inductor


does not allow abrupt change in current. Consider a R – L circuit which contains only one
inductor and more than one resistor as shown.

t=0 ()

S
Resistive +
Network ()
_
R eq

Fig. R-L circuit

To find i (t) for t 0 in the circuit shown above,

(1) Find initial value of current through inductor, I i ( )


(2) Find steady state value of current through inductor, I i ( )
(3) Find as seen from terminals of inductor
(4) Use following equation to find i (t)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 51
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

i (t) = I (I I )e and V (t) L (I I) e , where L⁄

Transient response of a R-C circuit

Consider the R –C circuit shown below, in which switch S is moved from position1 to position 2
at t = 0.
t =0
s
+ V
V
V (t) V V
 -
+
V (t)
-

Fig. R-C circuit


(V V )⁄
V( ) = V( ) = V ; ( ) = 0; ( )=

As I ( ) I( ), capacitor allows abrupt change in current. Also, V ( ) V ( ) as capacitor


doesn’t allows abrupt change in voltage Consider a R- C circuit which contains only one
capacitor and more than one resistor as shown.

S
i (t)

t=0 +
Resistive
Network V (t)
C _
R eq

Fig. R-C circuit

To find V (t) for t 0

(1) Find initial value of voltage across capacitor, V V ( )


(2) Find steady state value of voltage across capacitor, V V ( )
(3) Find as seen from terminals of capacitor
(4) Use following equation to find V (t)

( )
V (t) = V (V V)e and i (t) where = C

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 52
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Transient response analysis of a source free series R-L-C circuit

i(t) V(t)
+ -
-
C
V( )
R
L
i( )=

Fig. Series R-L-C circuit

Let = R/2L, and a, b = - ±√


Table. Different cases of series R-L-C circuit


S. No Condition Nature of General form of i(t) Graph
response of i (t)
Over-damped A e A e (a and b are i(t)
1. negative, real and unequal)
t

Critically (A A t) e
2. i(t)
damped (a is negative and real)
t

Under-damped e (A cos t A sin t) i(t)


3. where √

Here A , A can be found using initial conditions.

Transient response analysis of a source free parallel R L C circuit


v(t)

I
( )
R
L C
( )

Fig. Parallel R-L-C circuit

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 53
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Let = , and a ,b = - ±√

Table Different cases of parallel R-L-C circuit


S. No Condition Nature of General form of v(t) Graph
response of v (t)
1. Over-damped A e A e v(t)
(a and b are negative, real and
unequal)
t

Critically (A A t) e
2. damped (a is negative and real) v(t)

Under-damped e (A cos t A sin t)


3. V(t)
where √

Generalization of response f (t) for an excitation g (t)

In any general R-L-C circuit, let f(t) be the response for an excitation g(t). The response f(t) can
be generalized as below,

f(t)=f (t) f (t)

Here, f (t) is called natural response and is found based on initial conditions assuming no source
is present and f (t) is called forced response which is derived based on source of excitation.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 54
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

2.3: Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis


Phasor representation

Any sinusoidal representation, V(t) = V sin( t ) can be represented in phasor form as,
V V

V V

Reference

Fig. Phasor representation of sinusoidal signal V(t) of angular frequency

For phasor analysis of V (t) and V (t), following conditions should be satisfied,

(a) V (t) and V (t) should have same sign for V and V .
(b) Both V (t) and V (t) should be written as sine/cosine waves.
(c) Both V (t) and V (t) should have same frequency.

Impedance

Table. Impedances of different a.c. circuit components


S. No Component Impedance
1.
R Z= R
2. Z=J L
L
`
3. Z=
C
`
4. Z J L
R L
` `
5. J
Z
R
C J C C
`
`
6.
Z J L J( L )
R L C J C C
` ` `

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 55
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Sinusoidal excitation of different components

Excitation to resistor

I R
I

Fig. - phasor relation for resistor

Excitation to Inductor

Z j L

Fig. V I phasor relation for inductor

Sinusoidal excitation to Capacitor

Fig. phasor relation for capacitor


Sinusoidal excitation to RL circuit

R L
I
L ( )
V tan

Fig . Phasor relation in R-L circuit

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 56
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Excitation to R-C Circuit

I tan ( )
R C
( )
V

Fig. Phasor relation in a R-C circuit

Root mean square (rms) value of a periodic signal


The rms value of a periodic signal is defined as equivalent dc signal which will consume same
power as periodic signal. If V(t) is a periodic signal of period T ,

V √ ∫ v (t)dt

Consider a signal, V’(t) = V V sin t V sin t ---------

V = √V ( ) ( )
√ √

Average value of a periodic signal


Average value of a periodic signal gives an idea about d.c. content of the signal. If V(t) is signal of
period T,
V ∫ V(t) dt
Average power supplied by a.c. source

∅ a . c.
Network
~

Fig . Demonstration of power supplied by a.c. source

Apparent power , S = V ∙ I * (in rms sense) = V I Cos (θ- ∅) J V I in(θ ∅)= P + JQ


Active power, P = cos (θ - ∅) V I cos (θ - ∅ )

Reactive power, Q = sin(θ-∅ ) V I sin(θ ∅)

Active power is the power supplied to resistive part of the network and is measured in watt.
Reactive power is the power supplied to inductive or capacitive part of the network and is
measured in var. Power factor (PF) of circuit as seen from source is given as cos (θ - ∅) Pf gives
an idea about part of VA supplied to resistive part of network.

Resonance
At resonance, voltage and current as seen from supply are in phase. Also at resonance,
impedance as seen from supply is completely resistive.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 57
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Single phase Circuit analysis


Most of the analysis techniques used for dc networks can be used for ac networks also. However,
algebraic operations should be replaced by phasor operations and all the theorems can be
relevantly applied.
Maximum Power transfer theorem
Maximum power transfer theorem gives an idea about the maximum power consumed in Z
depending on the nature of Z . Consider an a c network and corresponding Thevenin’s
equivalent as seen from load terminals A and B as shown in figure below.

A
A
a.c ~
network

B B

Fig. Demonstration of maximum power transfer theorem

Depending nature of Z and Z , following are the possible cases and corresponding conditions
for maximum power transfer,
(1) If Z and Z are resistive , Z Z .
(2) If Z and Z are impedance , Z = Z .
(3) If Z is complex and Z is resisitive , Z Z .
(4) If Z = JX such that X is fixed and is variable, then , Z JX .
(5) If Z JX is such that is fixed and X is variable, then X = Im(Z ).
(6) If Z JX is such that θ tan ( ) is constant and | Z is varied , then | Z | = |
Z |.
(7) For any arbitrary nature of Z and Z , appropriate value of Z can be found using Lagrange’s
optimization.

Star-delta transformation

A
A

ZA
Z1 Z2

B
Z3 C ZC
ZB
B
C
Fig. Star-Delta equivalent transformation

Z ( )
; Z ( )
; Z ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
Z ;Z ;Z

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 58
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Polyphase Circuit Analysis

Single phase three wire system


a A

~
n N

~
b B

Fig. Single phase 3 wire system


V =V
V =V V = 2V
I =V Z
I =V Z
I =I I =
If the load is balanced, Z = Z
I

The wire nN is neutral wire. So if the load is balanced, current in neutral wire is zero. If the wires
aA and bB have same impedance, still current in neutral wire is 0. If loads are unbalanced and Nn
wire has some finite impedance, power dissipated in nN is finite.

Three phase source

a B
b
~ ~

~
c C

Fig. Three phase balanced supply(in positive sequence)

Consider a balanced supply as shown,


|V | |V | |V |

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 59
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

V V V

V V rms
V V rms } Positive phase sequence
V V rms

V V rms
V V rms } Negative phase sequence
V V rms

Three –phase Y-Y Connection including neutral (for balanced supply)

a b B
A
  ZA
Z
n N
B

 Z
C

c
C
Fig. Y-Y connection

I ; I ;I

Let V , I , V and I stand for line voltage, line current, load voltage and load current.
If load is balanced, Z Z Z Z ∅

I I I and |I | |I | |I | = I =

Power consumed by load = 3 V I cos∅ = √ V I cos∅


V √ V and I I
If the load is balanced neutral wire can be removed as I is zero.
If load is not balanced, I
Z I I
Power consumed by load = ∑ V I ∙ cos∅ (if load is not balanced)

Three Phase Y – Connection: (for balanced supply)

I ; I I

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 60
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

A
a b
ZA ZB
 A

n
C ZC B

c

Fig. Y- Connection
If the load is balanced, Z Z Z Z ∅

Power consumed by load, P =√ V I Cos∅


V V I √ I

If the load is not balanced, Power consumed by load, P = ∑ V ∙ ∙ cos∅

Magnetically Coupled circuits


Two circuits are magnetically coupled, if operation of one circuit is effected by flux linkage due
to coil in another circuit In a magnetically coupled circuit “Current entering dotted terminal of
one coil will produce a voltage which is sensed positive at the dotted terminals of another coil
and vice versa” o voltage across one coil depends not only on self inductance but also on
mutual inductance which gives extent of flux linkage between the two coils. Please note that dot
convention doesn’t make sense when it’s associated with single coil
m
+
+
V (t)=L
i (t) V (t) V (t)
- V (t)=m
L L -
m
+
+ V (t) L
i (t) V (t) V (t)
- V (t) m
L L -

m
+
+ V (t) L
V (t) V (t) i (t)
- V (t) m
- L L

m
+ V (t) L
+
V (t) V (t) i (t)
- V (t) m
- L L

Fig. Demonstration of dot convention

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 61
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

As the flux linkage in coil 1 due to the coil 2 is same as flux linkage in coil 2 due to coil 1,
m m =m

Also coefficient of coupling, K = m / √L L ; Here ≤ K ≤ ≤ m ≤ √L L

Co –efficient of coupling is in [0 , 1] as flux linkage in one coil due to current in other coil will
always be less than the flux produced by the same.

m
+
+
i (t) V (t) V (t)
- i (t)
-
L L

Fig. Demonstration of dot convention (Commutative connection)

V (t) L m & V (t) L +m

In frequency domain V ( J L )I (J m )I & V (J m)I (J L )I


Instantaneous energy stored = L i (t) L i (t) m i (t)i (t)
Total energy stored = L I L I mI I

+ +
i (t) V (t) i (t)
V (t)
- -
L L

Fig. Demonstration of dot convention (Differential Connection)


V (t) L m & V (t) L -m
In frequency domain, V ( J L )I (J m )I & V (J m)I (J L )I

Instantaneously energy stored = L i (t) L i (t) m i (t)i (t)

Total energy stored = L I L I mI I

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 62
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

2.4: Transfer Function of an LTI System


Transfer function of a LTI system is defined as ratio of Laplace transform of output to the
Laplace transform of input assuming initial conditions are zero. (LTI means linear and time-
invariant)

h(t) g(t)=f(t)*h(t)
f(t)

Fig. LTI system

If L{f(t)}=F(S), L{h(t)}=H(S) and L{g(t)}=G(S), G(S)=H(S) .F(S)

G( )
Transfer function of system, H(S) = ⁄F( )

Output response of a LTI system of transfer function, H(s)

Let the output response of a LTI system be defined as g(t) for a input f(t),

g(t) = g (t)+g (t)

where g (t) is transient response of system and g (t) is steady state response of system.

Let H(S) has poles at p , i=1, --------n.

g (t) = L (F( ) H( )) and g (t)=∑ Ae

g(t) ∑ Ae L (F( ) G( ))

Here constant A can be found based on initial conditions. Above analysis can be used in R-L-C
circuits to get voltage/current response at any time t.

Locus of phasors

Given any response G( ) substitute σ J to get generalized phasor of G( ) Locus of G(S) can
be obtained by varying σ and Thus the locus gives an idea about the phasor at different
frequencies.

Circuit analysis at a generalized frequency

Any circuit can be generalized to operate at a frequency σ J For dc signals σ and


and for ac signals σ Let V(t) V e cos( t ∅) be the input to a network shown
below and let the response be i(t) I e cos( t θ). We see that V and I have a frequency of
σ J In phasor form the circuit can be represented as below,

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 63
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

a.c

∅ N
at
at S=( )
S=( )

Fig. Circuit analysis of generalized frequency (S = ( + J )).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 64
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

2.5: Two Port Networks


Definitions

“One port network” is a network which has a pair of terminals across which voltage can be
applied and current can pass. “Two port network” is a network which has two pairs of terminals
of above type. Let V = [V V ] and I = [I I ] be the voltages across and the currents through
the two ports of the network.

+ +

N/W

-
-

Fig. Two port network

Z -Parameter (open circuit parameters or impedance parameters)


V Z Z I
[ ]=[ ] [ ] V = ZI
V ⏟Z Z I

Y –Parameters (admittance parameter or short circuit parameter)

I Y Y V Z Z Y Y
[ ] =[ ][ ] V = YI; Also [ ] [ ] ( Y Z )
I ⏟Y Y V Z Z Y Y

h - Parameters (hybrid parameters)

V h h I
[ ]=[ ][ ]
I ⏟h h V

ABCD - Parameters (Transmission line or chain parameters)

2 port
N/W

Fig. Two port network (for ABCD parameters)

V A B V
[ ]=* +[ ]
I ⏟C D I

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 65
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

G-Parameters

I g g V
[ ]
V
*g
⏟ g + [I ] G H

Condition for reciprocity and symmetry

Table: Conditions for reciprocity and symmetry

S. NO Parameter Condition for passive network Condition for symmetry


or reciprocity
1 Z Z =Z Z =Z
2 Y Y =Y Y =Y

3 ABCD A B A=D
| |=1
C D
4 h h = -h h h
| |=1
h h

For converting one type of parameters to any other type, write equations to express relation
between V I V & I in terms of given parameters and convert the same into the required form
to get the target parameters.

Inter-connection of two port networks:

If two 2-port networks A and B are connected in parallel, then Y-parameters of cumulative
network is equal to sum of individual Y-parameters. If two 2-port networks A and B are
connected in series, then Z parameters get added. If two 2-port networks A and B are connected
in cascade, then ABCD parameters of cumulative network are equal to product of individual
ABCD parameters.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 66
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

2.6: Network Topology


Definitions

Graph: A network in which all nodes and loops are retained, but its branches are represented by
lines.

i) Voltage sources – replaced by short circuit.

ii) Current sources – replaced by open circuit.

Sub-graph: A sub graph is a subset of the original set of graph branches along with their
corresponding nodes.

Tree: A connected sub-graph containing all nodes of a graph but no closed path. The branches of
tree are called Twigs.

Co-tree: Complement of Tree is called as Co-tree. The branches of co-tree are called as Links.

Formula: L = B-N+1, where

L = No. of links of co-tree,

B = No. of branches of graph,

N = Total no of nodes in graph

Nodal Incidence Matrix

Definition

It is defined as a matrix which completely defines which branches are incident at which nodes
and the corresponding orientation.

i) Anxb= {ahk} is a matrix of dimension n b, n = no. of nodes, b = no. of branches

ii) Rank of Incidence Matrix is n -1.

iii) Sum of elements of any column is zero

A = 1, if branch k is associated with node h and oriented away from node h

= - 1, if branch k is associated with node h and oriented towards node h

= 0, if branch k is not associated with node h

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 67
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

Applications in Network Theory

We can write KCL, using the nodal incidence matrix as follows:

Anxb Ib = 0 where Ib = [i1,i2 ib] is branch current vector

No. of trees = Det |AAT|

Reduced Incidence Matrix

When any node is taken as reference, then the voltages of other nodes can be measured with
respect the assigned reference. In the Fig, taking node 4 as reference reduces the matrix, to
Reduced Incidence Matrix, dimensions being (n-1xb).

(3)
(3)
2 2
1 3 1 3
(2) (4)
(2) ( (4)
(1) (6)
(1) (5) (6)
(5)
+
- V

4 4
(A) (B)

Fig. Demonstration of network topology

A = [ At At]

Where A is a square matrix of order (n-1) (n- 1) and A is a matrix of order (n-1) (b n + 1)
whose columns correspond to the links.

Loop Incidence Matrix (Fundamental Tie-set Matrix)

Definition

It is defined as the matrix representation in which the loop orientation is to be the same as the
corresponding link direction.

Rank of B is b-n+1;

Steps to get this Matrix

1. Draw the oriented graph of network. Choose a tree.

2. Each link forms an independent loop & the direction of this loop is same as that of the
corresponding link. Choose each link in turn.

3. Prepare the tie-set matrix Blxb = {bhk}, l = no of loops, b = no of branches, defined as follows.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 68
Quick Refresher Guide Network Theory

To write a Tie Set Matrix for Fig 1, steps have been stated schematically.

b = +1, if branch k is in loop h and their orientations coincide

= - 1, if branch k is in loop h and their orientations do not coincide

= 0, if branch k is not in loop

Applications in Network Theory

We can write KVL, using the loop incidence matrix as follows

BlxbVb = 0, where Vb = [v1, v2 vb] is branch voltage vector

=> Ib = [Blxb]T , where = [i1, i2 i ] is loop current vector

Fundamental Cut-Set Matrix

It is defined as a set of branches whose removal cuts the connected graph into two parts such
that the replacement of any one branch of the cutest renders the two part connected.

Rank of Q is n-1

Steps to get Cut-Set

1. Draw the oriented graph of a network and choose a tree.

2. For n-1 twigs, we will get n-1 cut sets will exist.

3. Direction of cut-set is same as twigs. Choose each twig in turn to obtain the matrix.

4. Prepare the cut set matrix Q(n-1)x b = {qij}, where n = no of nodes, b = no of branches as
follows,

q = 1, if branch j is in the cut-set i, and the orientations coincide


= - 1, if branch j is in the cut-set i and the orientations do not coincide
= 0, if branch j is not in the cut-set i

Applications in Network Theory

From the cut-set matrix, we can write equations relating the branch voltages to the node
voltages as follows, [Q(n-1) x b]Ib = 0 => Vb = [Q(n-1) x b]TVn-1

where Vn-1 = [v1, v2 vn-1] is node voltage vector

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 69
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Part – 3: Signals and Systems

3.1: Introduction to Signals & Systems

Introduction
Signal is defined as a function that conveys useful information about the state or behaviour of a
physical phenomenon. Signal is typically the variation with respect to an independent quantity
like time.

System
System is defined as an entity which extracts useful information from the signal or processes the
signal as per a specific function.

Classification of Signals
Continuous-Time vs Discrete-Time Signals
Continuous-time signal is defined as a signal which is defined for all instants of time. Discrete
time Signal is a signal which is defined at specific instants of time only and is obtained by
sampling a continuous – time signal. Also discrete-time signals are defined only at integer
instants, is n ∈ z. Digital signal is obtained from discrete-time signal by quantization.

Conjugate Symmetric vs Skew Symmetric Signals


A continuous time signal x(t) is conjugate symmetric if x(t) = x*(-t); t. If x(t) = -x* (-t); t. Also,
x(t) is conjugate skew symmetric.
Any arbitrary signal x(t) can be considered to constitute 2 parts as below,
x(t) = x t + x t
( )
where x t = conjugate symmetric part of signal = and
( )
x t = conjugate skew symmetric part of signal =

Periodic vs Non-Periodic Signals


A continuous –time signal is periodic if there exists T such that

x(t+T) = x(t), t ;T ∈ R – {0}

The smallest positive value of T that satisfies above condition is called fundamental period of
x(t).
A discrete-time signal is periodic if there exists N such that

x[n] = x[n+N], n ; N ∈ Z – {0}

The smallest positive N that satisfies above condition is called fundamental period of x[n]. If
x t and x t are periodic signals with periods T and T respectively, then x(t) = x t +
x t is periodic iff (if and only if) is a rational number and period of x(t) is least common

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 70
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

multiple (LCM) of T and T . If x n is periodic with fundamental period N and x n is periodic


with fundamental period M than x[n] = x n x n is always periodic with fundamental
period equal to the least common multiple (LCM) of M and N.

Energy & Power Signals


The formulas for calculation of energy, E and power, P of a continuous/discrete-time signal are
given in table below,

Table. Formulae for calculation of energy and power


S. NO Nature of the signal Formulas for energy & power calculation
1. Continuous-time, ∫ |x t | t lim ∫– |x t | t
non-periodic
2. Continuous-time, ∫ |x t | t P= ∫– |x t | t
periodic signal
with period T
3. Discrete-time, non- lim ∑ |x n | lim ∑ |x n |
periodic
4. Discrete-time, lim ∑ |x n | ∑ |x n |
periodic signal
with period (2N +
1)

Characteristics of systems
Linearity
A system is linear if it satisfies superposition principle; i.e, weighted sum of inputs when given to
a system should give a weighted sum of outputs. In general, for continuous time systems,

T {∑ . }= ∑ where = T{

Time-Invariance
A system is time-invariant if delayed version of input leads to a delayed version of output by the
same amount. For continuous – time system to be time-invariant, y(t - .

Causality
A system is said to be causal if output at any instant depends upon past and present inputs only.
A system is called anti-causal, if output at any instant depends on future inputs only. A system is
called non-causal, if output at any instant depends upon future inputs also. From above anti-
causality implies non-causality, but the converse is not true.

Memoryless Property
A system is said to be memoryless if output at any instant depends on input at that instant,
otherwise the system is said to have memory.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 71
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Stability
A system is said to be stable in bounded input bounded output sense if for any bounded input
the system gives bounded output, otherwise system is unstable.
For continuous time signals, |x t | | | stability
Invertibility
A system is said to have inverse, if there exists another system so as to recover the original input
from the output of first system.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 72
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

3.2: Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems

Convolution Sum
Any arbitrary signal x[n] can be described as, ∑ .

Discrete – Time
x[n] y[n]
LTI System

Fig. Discrete –time LTI system

Consider a discrete-time LTI system described as,

∴ For LTI system, ∑ where h[n] is impulse response of


the system.

Properties/Characterization of LTI System Using Impulse Response


Memoryless System
If system is memoryless, y[n] depends on only input at that instant,

∴ . . n where C∈R

Causal System
If system is causal, y[n] depends on past and present inputs, x m m n

∴h n for n , if system is c us l.

Stable System
∴ ∑ | | should be finite for BIBO stability

Invertible LTI System


For a continuous time LTI system of impulse response, h(t) if there exists a impulse response
h (t) such that, , then is called inverse LTI system and h(t) is called
invertible LTI system.

Representation of Continuous/Discrete-Time System


Transformation
Define a mapping related to input and output of system. y(t) = T{x(t)}

Representation of Continuous/Discrete-Time LTI System


Transformation
Define a mapping related to input and output of system.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 73
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Impulse response
Impulse response uniquely represents a LTI system

LCCDE (Linear Constant Coefficient Difference Equation)


LCCDE represents the output at instant n, in terms of output and inputs.

∑ . ∑ . ; Where , ∈R.

System Function ( H(e /H(z))


From LCCDE, system functions H(e H(z) can be derived as below.

∑ .
where F h n e
∑ .

∑ .
n where hn z
∑ .

Determining Impulse Response from Step Response


For a discrete-time LTI system, if y n is unit step response, impulse response h[n] is given as,

For a continuous-time LTI system, if y t is unit step response, h(t) is given as,

Response of LTI System to Sinusoidal Input


Figure shown below gives the response of a discrete-time LTI system to a sinusoidal input.

x[n] = h[n] y[n] = A |H( |.


( ( ( )))

Fig. Sinusoidal response of a discrete-time LTI system

The above relation implies that a LTI system produces a sinusoid in response to a sinusoid, the
amplitude is multiplied by a factor |H( )| and phase is changed by a factor rg( ).
The frequency response of a system gives information about how it affects sinusoidal input at a
particular frequency.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 74
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

3.3: Fourier Representation of Signals

Introduction
Here we represent signals as a linear combination of complex exponentials. The resulting
representations are known as the continuous time and discrete time Fourier series and
transform (depending on the nature of signal i.e. continuous/discrete and periodic/non
periodic).
Fourier Representations
Table: Fourier representation of signal
S. No Nature of Signal Representation Nature of Frequency
Representation
1 Continuous-time, Periodic Fourier series Discrete, non-periodic
2 Discrete-time, Periodic Discrete Time Fourier Series (DTFS) Discrete, periodic
3 Continuous-time, Non Continuous-Time Fourier Transform Continuous, non-
periodic (CTFT) periodic
4 Discrete-time, Non Discrete Time Fourier Transform Continuous, periodic
periodic (DTFT)

From the above table, we see that continuous-time signals have non-periodic frequency
representation and discrete-time signals have periodic frequency representation. Also periodic
signals have discrete frequency representation and non-periodic signals have frequency
representation which is continuous in nature.
Fourier series (FS) for Continuous –Time Periodic Signals
Complex FS representation
Let x(t) be continuous –time periodic signal with period T,
X(k) = ∫
x(t) = ∑ where T is period of x(t) and T

x(t) F S, X(k)
Alternate Fourier Series Representation
If f(x) is a signal of period 2T,
∑ cos ∑ sin where ⁄
Here ∫ is the dc component of f(x),
∫ . cos and

If f(x) is even,
∫ ∫ cos
If f(x) is odd,

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 75
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Discrete Time Fourier Series(DTFS)


Let x̃ n is be discrete –time signal of period N,
x̃ n DTF S, ̃k

x̃ n = ∑ ̃k where
̃ k = ⁄ ∑ x̃ n
̃ k is also periodic with period N and is discrete in nature.

Fourier Transform (FT) for Continuous –Time Non-Periodic Signals

Let x(t) be a continuous-time non-periodic signal,


x(t) F.T. j
j is continuous with respect to n is non-periodic

j ∫ x t
x(t) = ∫ j
The Fourier Transform X(j m y not exist for ll functions x t . For the Fourier tr nsform to
exist, x(t) must satisfy the Dirchlet conditions given below,
 The signal x(t) must be absolutely integrable, i.e ∫ | x t | .
 The signal x(t) must have finite number of local maxima and minima and discontinuities in
any finite interval.
 The size of each discontinuity must be finite.
Discrete Time Non Periodic Signals: Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT)
Let x[n] be a discrete-time non-periodic signal,
x[n] DTFT X( )
X( )=∑ n
x[n] = ∫
If the sequence, x[n] is absolutely summable, i.e. ∫ | | , then DTFT of the sequence,
x[n] exists.

Properties of Fourier Representation


Symmetry Property - Real & Imaginary signals
If x(t) is real, Im x t n x t Re x t ,

∴ FT is conjugate symmetric magnitude spectrum is symmetric.
If x(t) is imaginary,

∴ FT is conjug te skew-symmetric magnitude spectrum is symmetric.
If x(t) is conjugate symmetric,
x t x t

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 76
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

∴ FT is re l ⌊ (
If x(t) is conjugate anti-symmetric
x t x t
∴ FT is im gin ry ⌊ ( ⁄

Table. Comments on CTFT based on signal properties


SL. No. Signal Property Comments on F. T.
1. Real Conjugate symmetric
2. Imaginary Conjugate anti-symmetric
3. Conjugate symmetric Real
4. Conjugate anti-symmetric Imaginary

Scaling Property

x(a t) CTFT (
| |
a) Linear scaling in domain corresponds to a linear scaling in frequency domain.
b) Whenever a signal is compressed in time domain (a>1), it leads to expansion in frequency
and vice versa.

Convolution Property
For continuous-time signals,

x t ↔ j

y t ↔ j

x t y t ↔ j . j
Convolution in time domain results in multiplication in frequency domain.
Parseval Theorem
Energy or power in the time domain representation is equal to energy or power in frequency
domain representation.

∫ | | ∫ | | ,

∑ | | ∫ | |

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 77
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

3.4: Z-Transform

Introduction

ZT is a generalization of frequency response for discrete-time signals.


Two sided ZT/Bilateral ZT, ∑
One sided ZT/Unilateral ZT, ∑ .

For |z| or z e , T is equal to DTFT. Therefore ZT evaluated along unit circle reduces to
DTFT. For any given sequence, the set of values of Z for which the Z transform converges is
called the region of convergence (ROC).

Rational Representation of Z.T. (X(z))


Consider the class of Z transform where in X(z) can be expressed as,

X(z) = where P(z) is numerator polynomial and Q(z) is denominator


polynomial
Values of z for which P(z)=0 are called the zeroes of X(z).Values of z for which Q(z) = 0 are
called the poles of X(z). Location of poles of X(z) is related to the ROC and ROC is bounded by
poles. To uniquely specify a discrete time signal, one needs to specify both X(z) and ROC.

x [n] = an u[n] Z.T (z) = ; ROC : |z| > |a|

x [n] = -an u(-n-1) Z.T (z) = ; ROC : |z| < |a|

From above we see that two different signals x n and x [n] have same Z-transform but
different ROCs.

Properties of ROC
(1) ROC of X(z) consists of a ring in the z-plane centered about the origin.
(2) ROC does not contain any poles, but is bounded by poles.
(3) If x[n] is a finite duration sequence, then ROC is the entire z plane except possibly z = 0 or
z .
(4) If x1[n] is a right sided sequence, then ROC extends outward from the outermost pole to
possi ly inclu ing z . As c us l sequences re right si e , RO of those sequences is
outside a circle.
(5) If x2[n] is a left sided sequence, the ROC extends inward, from the innermost non-zero pole
to possibly including z = 0. As anti-causal sequences are left sided, ROC of those sequences is
inside a circle.
(6) If x3[n] is two sided sequence, the ROC will consist of a ring in the z plane bounded on the
interior and exterior by a pole.
(7) If is a finite duration sequence, ROC is entire z-pl ne except possi ly z or z .

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 78
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Properties of Z Transform
Linearity
a x1[n] + b x2[n] Z.T a X1(z) + b X2(z); ROC (R1 R2)
ROC in the current case is at least ( R R ). If there is no poles zero cancellation, ROC will be
(R R ). If there is a pole-zero cancellation, ROC may be more than R R . If R R ∅,
then Z{ax n x n oesn’t exist.

Time Shifting
.
X[n – no]↔ z . (z)
If no>0, ROC is R except z = 0. If no< 0, ROC is R except z = .

Modulation
.
an x[n] ↔ X( ; ROC: |a| r1 < |z| < |a| r2

.
If |a|>1, Z transform gets shrinked in Z-domain and vice versa. If a = e , r.e .
Multiplication in time domain by e results in frequency shift in frequency domain by
.

Differentiation in Z- domain
. z
nx n ↔ z RO R
z
Conjugate property
.
x n ↔ z RO R
Time Reversal property
.
x n ↔ ( ) RO r | | r
z z
Convolution property
.
x n x n ↔ z z RO R R
Initial Value Theorem
x[0] = lim z
If X(z) is expressed as ratio of polynomials P(z) and Q(z), order of P(z) should be less than that
of Q(z) for initial value theorem to be applied to X(z).

Final Value Theorem


lim x n = x[ ] = lim z z

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 79
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Necessary condition for applying final value theorem is that poles of (1-z X(z) should be
strictly inside the unit cycle.

Characterization of LTI System from H(z) and ROC

x[n] h[n] y[n]

ZT
h[n] H(z) ; ROC

Fig. LTI System

A LTI system can be characterized for causality, stability and memoryless properties based on
ROC of the system function, H(z).

1. If ROC includes unit circle, then system is stable.


2. If ROC is outside a circle, then system is causal.
3. If ROC is inside a circle, then system is anti-causal.
4. If ROC is all z, then system is memoryless.
5. If ROC is strictly a ring, then system is non-causal.
6. If ROC includes unit-circle, then the system’s impulse response is solutely summ le n
hence DTFT of the sequence exists.

Finding Inverse Z.T. given X(z) and ROC


By Inspection and Partial Fraction
Given X(z) in rational form, split it into partial fractions and based on ROC, find x[n] by
inspection.

By Division
Given X(z) in rational form, perform the division based on the condition that x[n] is causal or
anti-causal and find X(z) in expansion form.

By Power Series Expansion


Given X(z) in a standard form, find the expansion of X(z), then x[n]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 80
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

3.5: Laplace Transform

Introduction
Laplace Transform (LT) is a method to get generalized frequency domain representation of a
continuous – time signal and is generalization of CTFT (Continuous Time Fourier Transform).

Definition of Laplace Transform

f t F s ∫ e . f t t : One sided/ unilateral LT where S σ

f t F s =∫ e . f t t : Two sided/ bilateral LT

Properties of Laplace transform


Frequency shift
[e-at f(t) ] = F(s + a) and [eat f(t) ] = F(s - a)
Time shift
[f(t – to)] = e . F(s)
Differentiation in Time domain

[ f t ] = s F(s) – f(0) where f(0) is initial value of f(t).

If initial conditions are zero (i.e, f(0) = 0),differentiating in time domain is equivalent to
multiplying by s in frequency domain.

Similarly, [ f t ] = s F(s) –s f(0) - f (0) where f (0) is the value of [ f t ] at t = 0

Integration in Time Domain

*∫ f t t+ and ,∫ f t t- ∫ f t t

Integration in time domain is equivalent to division by s in frequency domain, if f(t) = 0 for t < 0.
Differentiation in Frequency Domain

[ t f(t) ] = and t f t (F(s))

Differentiation in frequency domain is equal to multiplication by t in time domain.


Integration in Frequency Domain

* + = ∫ F s s

Integration in frequency domain is equal to division by t in time domain.


Initial Value Theorem
If f(t) and its derivative f t are Laplace transformable, then

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 81
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

lim f t lim sF s
This theorem does not apply to the rational function F(s) in which the order of numerator
polynomial is equal to or greater than the order of denominator polynomial.

Final Value Theorem


If f(t) and its derivative f (t) are Laplace transformable, then
lim f t lim sF s
For applying final value theorem, it is required that all the poles of be in the left half of s-
plane (strictly) i.e. poles on axis also not allowed.

Convolution theorem
.

Laplace transform of the periodic function


If f(t) is periodic function with period T, then

f t = . F (s) where F (s) = ∫ e f t t

Laplace transform of standard functions

Table: Laplace transform of standard functions

S. No Function, f(t) Laplace transform of f(t), L{f(t) = F(s)


1.

2. u(t)

3.

4. u(t) ⁄s

5. e .u t ⁄s

6. t.u(t) ⁄s

7. t .u t n

s

8. f(t).e u t F(s-a)
9. Sin at. u(t) ⁄s

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 82
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

10. Cos at. u(t) s⁄


s
11. sinhat. u(t) ⁄s

12. coshat. u(t) s⁄


s
13. f (t) s.F(s)-f(o )
14. f (t) s .F s s. f o ) –f (o )
15. ∫ ⁄s F(s)

16. ∫ .

17. f(t-a).u(t-a) e .F s
18. t .F t
. ( )

19. f(t⁄ ) | |. F s

20. f(at)
F s⁄
| |
21. f t F s . F s where * is convolution operator
f t =∫ .

22 e . cos t s ⁄ s

23 e sin t ⁄ s

24 .f t ∫ F s s

25 √

26

Applications

1. LT is generalization of CTFT for continuous-time signals and hence signal can be


characterized at any generalized frequency.
2. LT is helpful to perform transient and steady state analysis of any LTI system for any
arbitrary input and initial conditions.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 83
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

3.6: Frequency response of LTI systems and Diversified Topics

Frequency response of a LTI system


Consider a LTI system of impulse response h[n] as shown in figure below. For any arbitrary
input x[n], output y[n] can be found by convolution, as below,

y[n]= x[n] * h[n]

x[n] h[n] y[n]

Fig. LTI System

If F{x[n]} = e and Z{x[n]} = X(z),


(e ) (e ). e and Y(z) = H(z). X(z)
Here is called transfer function of LTI system and is called system function.

Amplitude Response
Plot of | e | with respect to is c lle the mplitu e response. It gives n i e out
frequency content of the signal and can be used to characterize the system.

Phase Response
Plot of ⌊ (e ) with respect to is called the phase response. Similar to magnitude
response, this can also be used to characterize the system.

Group Delay Response


Plot of ⁄ with respect to is c lle the group el y response.

Minimum Phase System

Minimum phase system is the system for which phase variation and energy variation are
minimum with respect to . Also if minimum ph se system is c us l, poles n zeroes re insi e
the unit circle.

Linear Phase System


The system for which phase variation with respect to is line r is c lle “line r ph se system”.
If ) is a linear phase system, ⌊ (e ) and hence . Also
group delay is constant for linear phase system. For a linear phase system with real impulse
response, zeroes form complex conjug te reciproc l p irs. So if there is zero t ‘ ’ for line r
phase system, then other zeroes are at , n . For a linear phase system with complex
impulse response, if there is zero t , then it’s ssure th t there is zero at

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 84
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

All – pass system


System which passes all the frequencies is called all-pass system
∴ | e | K; where K is a constant.
For a all-pass filter, system function can be generalized as
( )

For a all-pass system, poles and zeroes form a conjugate reciprocal pairs. Therefore for a all-pass
system with complex impulse response, if there is zero t ‘ ’, then there is pole t ⁄ and vice
versa. For an all-pass system with real impulse response, if there is a zero at a, then there is a
zero at and there are poles at ⁄ and ⁄ .

Magnitude transfer function


A system function z is c lle m gnitu e tr nsfer function, if it’s of form,
( ⁄ ) .
Therefore, for magnitude transfer function, poles form conjugate reciprocal pairs. Hence if there
is pole t ‘ ’, there is pole t ⁄ . Same applies for zeroes also.

Sampling
To get discrete-time signal from analog signal, sampling is performed on analog signal. Let x(t)
be analog signal & S(t) be impulse train,

∴ S(t) = ∑ t T where T is desired sampling interval

Sampled signal, x (t) = x(t) . s(t) = ∑ x T . t T


∴x ∑ k

After sampling, signal obtained above is still in time-domain. To get FT in discrete –time domain,
put T, which is c lle time norm liz tion

∴ X(e = ∑ ( ( ))

From above we see that X(e is perio ic with perio . To voi li sing, there should not be
any intervention between frequency bands.

∴ where is signal BW to avoid aliasing (Nyquist sampling


theorem)

As X(e is periodic, DTFT is described as one period of CTFT, if there is no aliasing.

To get x t from x[n], use low pass filter of impulse response h t = sin c(t/T) as in figure
below.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 85
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

- T T

Fig. Low-pass filter

x t =∑ x k sin c t T where sin c(x) =

∴ = X(e . where T

Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)


DFT is a sampled version of DTFT of a non-periodic signal x[n] in the range of (- , . This is
mainly required for processing by computers. Consider a signal x[n] of length N, then its DFT,
X[k] is given as,

{∑ . , where e

∑ ,
{

Also, DFT is obtained by sampling DTFT with a period of


∴ e where

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)


For evaluating DFT of x[n], number of multiplications and additions required are . To
reduce the computational complexity, another implementation of DFT is used, which is called
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). Number of multiplications required for FFT is . log . FFT
uses butterfly architecture with in place computation to save the processing time and memory
requirements.

Filters
Filters are typically used to extract any useful information from a signal or to process a signal.

FIR Filters
Here output at any instant n, depends on only input and impulse response of FIR filter has finite
length.

IIR Filter
Here output at any instant n, depends on input and past/future output and impulse response of
IIR filter has infinite length.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 86
Quick Refresher Guide Signals & Systems

Correlation and Covariance


If x is a real and stationary signal, then auto-correlation and covariance functions can be
defined as below,
Auto-correlation function, R m x .x
Auto-covariance function, m x m . x m
Here m x and x is advanced version of x by m samples.
Power spectral density of x is given as (e ) F R n
(e ) ∑ R e
R ∫ (e ). e .

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 87
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Part – 4: Control System

4.1: Basics of Control System


Definition of Control system (CS)
It is a system by means of which any quantity of interest in a machine or mechanism is
controlled (maintained or altered) in accordance with the desired manner. Control systems can
be characterized mathematically by ‘Transfer function’ or ‘State model’. Transfer function is
defined as the ratio of Laplace Transform (LT) of output to that of input assuming that initial
conditions are zero. Transfer function is also obtained as Laplace transform of the impulse
response of the system.
pl tr ns orm o output
Tr ns r un tion |
pl tr ns orm o input
[ t ] S
T s |
[r t ] R S
For any arbitrary input r(t), output c(t) of control system can be obtained as below,
r(t) = (R (s)) = (T (s) . R (s)) (T(s)) * r(t)
Where L and are forward and inverse Laplace transform operators and * is convolution
operator.

Classification of Control Systems


Open-Loop Control System

Reference input Controller Process Output

 The reference input controls the output through a control action process. Here output has no
effect on the control action, as the output is not fed-back for comparison with the input.
 Due to the absence of feedback path, the systems are generally stable
Closed-Loop Control System (Feedback Control Systems):
Closed-Loop control systems can be classified as positive and negative feedback (f/b) control
systems. In a closed-loop control system, the output has an effect on control action through a
feedback.
G(s)

Output c(t)
Controller Process
Reference input r(t)
Feedback signal, f(t)

Feedback, H(s)
Network

Block diagram of closed loop control system

Let T(s) be the overall transfer function of the closed-loop control system, then

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 88
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

T(s) =
( )

Here negative sign in denominator is considered for positive feedback and vice versa.
S S → Op n loop tr ns r function
Error transfer function =

Effect of Feedback
1. Effect of Feedback on Stability
 Stability is a notion that describes whether the system will be able to follow the input
command.
 A system is said to be unstable, if its output is out of control or increases without bound.

2. Effect of Feedback on overall gain


 Negative feedback decreases the gain of the system and positive feedback increase the
gain of the system.
3. Effect of Feedback on Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the gain of the overall system T to the variation in G is defined as

S = =

Similarly, S = = 1
4. Negative feedback makes the system less sensitive to the parameter variation.
5. Negative feedback improves the dynamic response of the system
6. Negative feedback reduces the effect of disturbance signal or noise.
7. Negative feedback improves the bandwidth of the system.
Signal Flow Graphs (SFG)
A signal flow graph is a graphical representation of portraying the input-output relationships
between the variables of a set of linear algebraic equations. Also following are the basic
properties of signal flow graphs.
1. A signal flow graph applies to only linear systems.
2. The equations based on which a signal flow graph is drawn must be algebraic equation in
the form of effects as functions of causes.
3. Signals travel along branches only in the direction described by the arrows of the
branches.
4. The branch directing from node y to y represents the dependence of the variable yk upon
yj, but not the dependence of y upon y
5. A signal y travelling along a branch between nodes y and y is multiplied by the gain of
the branch, , so that signal y is delivered at node y .
M son’s in Formula
(∑ )
The general gain formula is, T= =

Where T = Overall gain between yin and yout


yout = output node variable

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 89
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

yin = input node variable


N = total number of forward paths
Pk = gain of the kth forward path
= determinant of the graph= 1 - ∑ Pm1 + ∑ Pm2 - ∑ Pm3 …..
= 1 – (sum of all individual loop gains) + (sum of gain products of all possible
combinations of two non- touching loops) – (sum of the gain products of all possible
combinations of three non- tou hing loops ….
= gain product of the mth possibl ombin tion o ‘r’ non-touching loops
= that part of the signal flow graph which is non-touching with the kth forward path

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 90
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.2: Time Domain Analysis

Introduction
Whenever an input signal or excitation is given to a system, the response or output of the system
with respect to time is known as time response of the system. The time response of a control
system is divided into two parts namely, transient and steady state response.
Total response of a system = transient response + steady state response (or C (t) = C tr (t) +
Css(t))
Where t is overall response of the system,
t is transient response component of the system and
t is steady state response component of the system

Following are salient characteristics of transient response of a control system.


 This part of the time response which goes to zero after a large interval of time.
 It reveals the nature of response (e.g. oscillatory or over damped)
 It gives an indication about the speed of response.
 It does not depend on the input signal, rather depends on nature of the system.
Following are the salient properties of steady state response of a control system.
 The part of the time response that remains even after the transients have died out is
said to be steady state response.
 The steady state part of time response reveals the accuracy of a control system.
 Steady state error is observed if the actual output does not exactly match with the input.
 It depends on the input signal applied.

Time Response of a First Order Control System


A first ord r ontrol syst m is on or whi h th high st pow r o ‘s’ in th d nomin tor o its
transfer function is equal to 1. Thus a first order control system is expressed by a transfer
function, = .

Time Response of a First Order Control System Subjected to Unit Step Input Function
As the input is a unit step function, r(t) = u(t) and R(s) = 1/s
Output is given by c(t) = (1 ) u(t)
The error is given by e(t) = r(t) – c(t) = . u(t)
The steady state error = im e(t) = im . u(t) = 0
→ →

Time Response of a First Order Control System Subjected to Unit Ramp Input Function
As the input is a unit ramp function, r(t) = t.u(t) and R(s) = 1 / s
Output is given as c(t) = ( t T T ) u(t)
The error is given by e(t) = r(t) c(t) = ( T T ) u(t)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 91
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

The steady state error is = im ( T T ) u(t) = T


From above we see that the output velocity matches with the input velocity but lags behind the
input by time T and a positional error of T units exists in the system.
Time Response of A First Order Control System Subjected to Unit Impulse Input Function

As R(s) = 1, C(s) = c(t) = ( T

The error is given by e(t) = r(t) c(t)


The steady state error is = im s E(s) = 0

Time Response of Second Order Control System


A s ond ord r ontrol syst m is on or whi h th high st pow r ‘s’ in th d nomin tor o its
transfer function is equal to 2. A general expression for the T.F. of a second order control system
is given by,

Characteristic Equation
The characteristic equation of a second order control system is given by
s s =0

The roots are j √ == j


Here is called natural frequency of oscillations,
= √ is called damped frequency of oscillations,
‘ is called damping ratio and affects damping and
‘ is called damping factor or damping coefficient.
Based on roots of characteristic equation, following can be highlighted.
 The real part of the roots denotes the damping
 Imaginary part denotes the damped frequency of oscillation
 Sustained oscillations are observed if the roots are lying on imaginary axis (j axis).
 As increases, system becomes less oscillatory and more sluggish.

Table: Nature of system response based on 𝛇

S. No Range of values of System Nature of system Nature of roots


response characteristic
equation
1. 0 Undamped Sustained/undamped Purly imaginary
2. 0< < Underdamped Oscillatory Complex
3. Critically Non-oscillatory Real and equal
damped
4. > Overdamped Non-oscillatory Real and different

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 92
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Time Response of a Second Order Control System Subjected to Unit Step Input Function

c(t) = ( sin t ) u t where = √ nd ф t n [ ]


The steady state error is = im sin [( √ )t [t n ]] u(t) = 0
→ √

Here the time constant T= (1 / ) and Speed of the system .

Transient Response Specification of Second Order Under-Damped Control System


The time response of an under damped control system exhibits damped oscillations prior to
reaching steady state.

C(t)
T n

Max. overshoot

2%
1

0.5 100%

0 td tr tp ts

Fig. Unit step response of second order underdamped control system

(1) Delay Time (td)


It is the time required for the response to rise to 50% of the final value from zero, in first
.
attempt. td =

(2) Rise Time (tr)


The time needed for the response to reach from 10% to 90% (for overdamped system) or 0 to
100% (for underdamped systems) of the desired value of the output at the very first instant.

tr = ; wh r φ t n-1 ( )

(3) Peak Time (tp)


It is the time required for the response to reach the peak value at the first instant.
tp =

Also the response exhibits overshoot and undershoot at the instants,

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 93
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

t where n

The local overshoots occur for n =1, 3, . . . . . . . and local undershoots occur for n =2, 4, . . . . .
Hence the first undershoot occurs at the instant, .

(4) Maximum Overshoot (Mp)


The maximum positive deviation of the output with respect to its desired value/ steady state
value is called Maximum overshoot.

Percentage overshoot = × 100 = × 100%

% Mp = exp (- /√ ) × 100

(5) Settling Time (ts)


For 2% tolerance band, the settling time is given by, ts = 4.
For 5% tolerance band, the settling time is given by, ts = 3.

Time Response of The Higher Order System And Error Constants


Steady state error, = im → = im → [ ]
Using Final value theorem, = im →

But C(s) = E(s) G(s) E(s) = = =

= im →

Type and Order of System


For the open-loop transfer function,
 The type indicates the number of poles at the origin and the order indicates the total
number of poles.
 The type of the system determines steady state response and the order of the system
determines transient response.
Let = im → = Position error constant
Let = im → = Velocity error constant
Let = im → = Acceleration error constant
Table. Steady state error as a variation of type of the system
Type 0 1 2 3
Step A( k ) 0 0 0

Ramp A/ 0 0

Parabolic A/ 0

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 94
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.3: Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion

Introduction
Any system is said to be a stable system, if the output of the system is bounded for a bounded
input (stability in BIBO sense) and also in the absence of the input, output should tend to zero
(asymptotic stability).
Based on above discussion, systems are classified as below,

1) Absolutely stable systems


2) Unstable systems
3) Marginally stable or limitedly stable systems
4) Conditionally stable systems
Depending on the location of poles for a control system, stability of the system can be
characterized in following ways.
 Stability of any system depends only on the location of poles but not on the location of zeros.
 If the poles are located in left side of s-plane, then the system is stable.
 If any of the poles is located in right half of s-plane, then the system is unstable.
 If the repeated roots are located on imaginary axis including the origin, the system is
unstable.
 When non-repeated roots are located on imaginary axis, then the system is marginally
stable.
 As a pole approaches origin, stability decreases.
 The pole which is closest to the origin is called dominant pole.
 If the variable parameter is varied from 0 to and the poles are always located on left side
of s-plane, then the system is absolutely stable.
 When variable parameter is varied from 0 to , if some point onwards, there is a pole in
right half of S-plane. Then system is called conditionally stable and typically stability is
conditioned on variable parameter.

Absolute Stability Analysis


Absolute stability analysis is by the qualitative analysis of stability and is determined by location
of roots of characteristic equation in s-plane.

Relative Stability Analysis


The relative stability can be specified by requiring that all the roots of the characteristic
equation be more negative than a certain value, i.e. all the roots must lie to the left of the line;
s = - 1, ( 1 > 0). The characteristic equation of the system under study is modified by shifting
the origin of the s – plane to s = - 1, i.e. by substitution s = z – 1. If the new characteristic
equation in z satisfies the Routh criterion, it implies that all the roots of the original
characteristic equation are more negative than – 1.

Also if it is required to find out number of roots of characteristic equation between the lines
S and S , perform Routh analysis by putting S z – 1, and find out number of roots
to right of S . Similarly find out number of roots to the right of S . The difference
between above two numbers gives the number of roots of characteristic equation between
and .

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 95
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Routh-Hurwitz Criterion
The Routh-Hurwitz criterion represents a method of determining the location of poles of
polynomial with constant real coefficient with respect to the left half and the right half of the s-
plane. Routh Hurwitz criterion mainly gives a flexibility to determine the stability of the closed
loop control system without actually solving for poles.

s s s s ………………….. s 0

S b =

S b =

S b b 0 =
S =
S d d =
1 =

If any power of s is missing in the characteristic equation, it indicates that there is at least one
root with positive real part, hence the system is unstable. If the characteristic equation contains
only odd or even powers of s, then roots are purely imaginary. Thus, the system will have
sustained oscillations in output response. Also when Routh – Hurwitz criterion is applied,
following difficulties can be faced.

Difficulty 1: When the first term in any row of the Routh array is zero while rest of the row has at
least one non-zero term.
 Th di i ulty is solv d i z ro o th irst olumn is r pl d by sm ll positiv numb r ‘ ’
and Routh array is formed as usual. Then as → 0 from positive side, elements in the first
column of Routh array are found out and stability analysis is done as usual.

Difficulty 2: When all the elements in any one row of the Routh array are zero.
 This situation is overcome by replacing the row of zeros in the Routh array by a row of
coefficients of the polynomial generated by taking the first derivative of the auxiliary
polynomi l nd Routh’s t st is p r orm d s usu l.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 96
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.4: Root Locus Technique

Introduction
Root locus is a locus of poles of transfer function of a closed loop control system when the
variable parameter is varied from 0 to . Depending on nature of variable parameter and range
of variation, root locus can be classified as below.
 Root Locus (RL) - (K is varied from 0 to )
 Complementary RL - (K is varied from 0 to )
 Complete RL - (K is varied from to )
 Root counter - (Multiple parameter variation )
Characteristic equation of above system is 1 + G(S) H(S) = 0. Usually while plotting root locus, a
forward path gain, K which is inherently present in G(S) is considered as independent variable
and roots of characteristic equation are considered as dependent variables. Any root of
0 satisfies following two conditions,
a) | |
b) 0 wh r K 0, , , …………

Rules for the Construction of Root Locus (RL)


Let P be the number of open-loop poles and Z be the number of open – loop zeroes of a control
system. Then the following are the salient features for construction of root locus plot.
1. The root locus is always symmetrical about the real axis.
2. The root locus always starts from open-loop poles for K=0 and ends at either finite open
– loop zeroes or infinity for K → .
3. The number of branches of root locus terminating at infinity is equal to (P-Z) .
4. The number of separate branches of the root locus equals either the number of open –
loop poles or the number of open-loop zeroes, whichever is greater.
N = max(P, Z)
5. A section of root locus lies on the real axis, if the total number of open-loop poles and
zeroes to the right of the section is odd and is helpful in determining presence of root
locus at any point on real axis.
6. If P >Z, (P- br n h s will t rmin t t ‘ ’ long str ight lin symptot s whose
angles are as given below,

; q 0, , , ……………..P-Z-1

If Z > P, (Z-P br n h s will st rt t ‘ ’ long str ight lin symptot s whos ngl s r
as given below,

; q = 0, 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . (Z-P-1)
7. The asymptotes meet the real axis at centroid s as given below

Sum o r l p rts o pol s Sum o r l p rts o z ros


P
8. Break – away point is calculated when root locus lies between two poles and break – in
point is calculated when root locus lies between two zeros. Break – away / Break – in

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 97
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

points are determined from the roots of the equation 0. Also r branches of the root
locus which meet at a point, break away at an angle of .

9. Angle of departure is calculated when there are complex poles. Also, angle of departure
from an open loop pole is given as below
0 ; q= 0, 1, 2, 3 . . . . . .
Where is the net contribution at the pole of all other open loop poles and zeros. Also,
angle of departure is tangent to root locus at complex pole.

10. Angle of arrival is calculated when there are complex zeroes. Also, angle of arrival at the
open loop zero is given as below
0 , q= 0, 1, 2, 3 . . . . . .
Also, angle of arrival is tangent to root locus of complex zero.
11. Th v lu o ‘K’ nd th point t whi h root lo us br n h ross s th im gin ry xis is
determined by applying Routh criterion to the characteristic equation. The roots at the
intersection point are imaginary. Also the points of intersection are conjugate, if all the
coefficients of S are real in the characteristic equation.

12. Th v lu o op n loop g in ‘K’ t ny point on the root locus can be calculated by


using the magnitude criteria,
Produ t o ph sor l ngth rom s to op n loop pol s
K
Produ t o ph sor l ngth rom s to op n loop z ros

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 98
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.5: Frequency Response Analysis Using Nyquist plot

Frequency Domain Specifications


Consider a closed – loop control system of open – loop transfer function G(S) and feed – back
transfer function, H(S). If the system has negative feedback, the overall transfer function is given
by M(S) = .

| |
Put S = J , | M(J |=| |

The plot of |M(J | with respect to is shown in figure below.

| |

3db

0
BANDWIDTH

Fig. Closed-loop frequency response of a control system

The response falls by 3 dB at frequency , from its low frequency value, called cut-off frequency
and the frequency range 0 to is called the bandwidth of the system. The resonant peak, M
occurs at resonance frequency, . The bandwidth is defined as the frequency at which the
magnitude gain of frequency response plot reduces to 1/√ = 0.707 (i.e. 3 db) of its low
frequency value.
For a second order control system,

M(s) = M j |M j |

B.W. = = √ √

M =

Polar Plot
onsid r ontrol syst m o tr ns r un tion s . Th sinusoid l tr ns r un tion j is
complex function which is given as,

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 99
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

j R [ j ] j m[ j ] or j | j | j =M Where M =
| | nd

j m y b r pr s nt d s ph sor o m gnitud M nd ph s ngl . As the input frequency


is v ri d rom 0 to , the magnitude M and phase angle change and hence the tip of the
ph sor j tr s lo us in th ompl x pl n , which is known as polar plot.
Consider a transfer function which consists of P poles and Z zeroes.

 tr ns r un tion do sn’t ont in pol s t origin, th n th pol r plot st rts rom 0 with
non-zero magnitude and terminates at 90 P with zero magnitude.
 If the transfer function consists of poles at origin, then the polar plot starts from 0 with
‘ ’ m gnitud nd nds t 0 P with zero magnitude.
Special Cases of LTI Control Systems

Minimum Phase System


If G(S) has no poles and zeroes in the R.H.S of S-pl n , th n th syst m is ll d “minimum ph s
syst m’. As z ro s r lso on l t h l on s-plane, inverse system of a minimum phase system is
also stable.

Non Minimum Phase System


If G(S) has at least one pole or zero in the R.H.S of S plane, then system is called non-minimum
phase system. Also the inverse system of a non-minimum phase system is unstable.

All Pass System


If G(S) has symmetric poles and zeroes about the about the imaginary axis, then system is called
“All p ss syst m”.

Also |G( | = K; where K is a constant.

Linear Phase System


A system is called linear phase if plot of with r sp t to is lin r.

; where K is a constant.

Nyquist Plot & Nyquist Stability Criteria


Nyquist criterion is helpful to identify the presence of roots in a specified region based on polar
plot of G(S).H(S). Thus, Nyquist stability analysis is more generalized than Routh criterion. By
inspection of polar plot of G(S).H(S) more information is obtained than the stability of the
control system.

If N is the number of encirclements of G(s).H(s) around ( J0) in counter-clockwise direction,


then

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 100
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Where is number of open loop poles with +ve real part and
is number of close-loop poles with +ve real part

Tips for Getting Nyquist Plot


1. Nyquist plot is symmetric with respect to real axis. So the plot from 0 is M( ,
the plot from 0 is ( .
2. If the system is type N system, the angle subtended by the plot at origin as varies from
0 0 is - N in clockwise direction.

Gain Margin
The gain margin is a factor by which the gain of a stable system can be increased to bring the
system on the verge of instability. If the phase cross-over frequency is denoted by , and the
m gnitud o j j t
is |G(j j |. The gain margin is given by

G.M = 20 log | |
d

Phase Margin:
The phase margin of a stable system is the amount of additional phase lag required to bring the
system to the point of instability. Phase margin is given as,
PM = 0 where is gain crossover frequency

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 101
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.6: Frequency Response Analysis Using Bode Plot

Bode Plots
Given open – loop transfer function of a closed – loop control system as G(S) H(S), the stability of
the control system can also be determined based on its sinusoidal frequency response (obtained
by substituting S = J . The quantities, M = 20 |G(J H(J | (in dB) and phase,
(in degrees) are plotted with respect to frequency on logarithmic scale
( in r t ngul r x s. Th plot obt in d bov is ll d “ od plot”. .M nd PM n b
found out from Bode plots, thus relative stability of closed loop control system can be assessed.

Bode Plots of K
M

Fig. Bode plots of constant

Bode Plots of ⁄ :
M
-20Ndb/decade

Fig. Bode plots of Nth order pole at 0.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 102
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Bode Magnitude Plot of ⁄

T
T
log 0
log

-20NdB/decade 0

Fig. Bode plots of G(s) H(s) = ⁄

Bode Plot of (1 + ST)

⁄ ⁄

Fig. Bode-Plots of G(S) H(S) = (1+ST)

Bode Magnitude Plot of Second Order Control System

-40 dB/dec

Fig. Bode magnitude plot of II order control system

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 103
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Bode magnitude plot of any open-loop transfer function G(s) H(s) can be found out by
superimposing individual magnitude plots of basic pole and zero terms. However phase
response can be found out as usual by substituting S = J .
M & N Circles
Constant Magnitude Loci: M-Circles
The constant magnitude contours are known as M-circles. M-circles are used to determine the
magnitude response of a close-loop system using open-loop transfer function. It is applicable
only for unity feedback systems.

[x ] y =[ ]

The above Eq. represents a family of circles with center at ( , 0 and radius as | | . On a
particular circle the value of M (magnitude of close-loop transfer function) is constant, therefore
these circles are called M-circles.

Constant Phase Angles Loci: N-Circles


The constant phase angle contours are known as N-circles. N-circles are used to determine the
phase response of a close-loop system using open-loop transfer function.

[x ] [y ] * +

For different values of N, above equation represents a family of circles with center at x = -½ , y =
1/2N and radius as√ . On a particular circle, the value of N or the value of phase angle of
the closed-loop transfer function is constant; therefore, these circles are called N-circles.
Ni hol’s h rt
The transformation of constant – M and constant – N circles to log-magnitude and phase angle
coordinates is known as the Nichols chart.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 104
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.7: Compensators & Controllers

Introduction
Many a times, performance of a control system may not be upto the expectation, in which case
the performance of the same can be improved by controllers or compensating networks.

1. Insertion of compensating network is nothing but addition of poles and zeros.


2. We can reduce the steady state error by increasing the forward path gain, but it makes the
system unstable and oscillatory.
3. Addition of a pole to the open loop transfer function will lead the system towards
instability. The speed of the response slows down. But the accuracy of the system
increases.
4. Addition of a zero to the open loop transfer function will lead the system towards
stability. The speed of the response becomes faster. But the accuracy of the system is
reduced.
Compensating Network
1. Cascade Compensation: The compensating network is introduced in forward path in this
case. Phase lag/ lead compensators fall into this category.
2. Feedback Compensation: The compensating network is introduced in feedback path in
this case.

Phase Lag Compensator


A compensator having the characteristic of a lag network is called a lag compensator. Hence, the
poles of this network should be closer to origin than zeroes.
1. Results in a large improvement in steady sate response (i.e. steady state error is reduced).
2. Results in a sluggish response due to reduced bandwidth.
3. It is low pass filter and so high frequency noise signals are attenuated.
4. Acts as an Integrator.
5. Settling time increases.
6. Gain of the system decreases.

+ +

1/ sC
_ _

Fig. Electric lag compensator

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 105
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Fig. Pole-zero plot of lag compensator

General form of lag compensator, s = .

Approximate
magnitude plot

| j | -20 dB/decade
in dB

j ф Phase plot
0

log

Fig. Bode plot of lag compensator

Frequency of maximum phase lag, =√ =√ T . T =


ф
Maximum lag angle, ф = t n [ ] = sin ( ) = ф

Phase Lead compensator
A compensator having the characteristics of a lead network is called a lead compensator. Lead
compensator has zero placed more closer to origin than a pole.
1. Lead compensation appreciably improves the transient response.
2. The lead compensation increases the bandwidth, which improves the speed of the
response and also reduces the amount of overshoot.
3. A lead compensator is basically a high pass filter and so it amplifies high frequency noise
signals.
4. Acts as a differentiator.
5. Settling time decreases.
6. Gain of the system increases.
7. There is no improvement in steady state response.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 106
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

1/ sC

+ +

_ _

Fig. Electrical lead network

T T

Fig. Pole-zero plot of a lead network


General form of transfer function of lead compensator, s = = .

Approximate magnitude plot

+ 20 dB/decade
20
| j |

20 √ )

1/T

0
ф
j
0
log


Fig. Bode plot for lead compensator

Frequency of maximum phase lead, =√ =√ T . T = .



ф
Also, ф = t n * + = sin * + ф

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 107
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Comparison of Phase Lag And Phase Lead Compensators

Table. Comparison of characteristics of lead and lag compensators

Characteristics Phase-Lead Phase-Lag


1. Circuit Differentiator Integrator
2. ξ n r s s ↑ n r s s ↑↑
3. w n r s s ↑ D r s s ↓
4. T rise , t settling D r s s ↓ n r s s ↑
5. Phase shift Increases Decreases
6. Phase Margin mprov ↑ R du ↓
7. Gain cross over n r s s ↑ D r s s ↓
frequency (w )
8. Band width Increases Decreases
9. Over shoot Decreases Decreases
10. Gain Decreases Increases
11. Steady state error Increases Decreases
12. Constant ( < >
13. Pole –zero |P|>|Z| |Z|>|P|
14. Wmax
√ √
15. sin ∅m)
16. Time constant R R

Phase Lag – Lead Compensator


A compensator having the characteristics of lag –lead network is called a lag – lead compensator.
1. A lag – lead compensator improves both transient and steady state response.
2. Bandwidth of the system is increased.
The transfer function of lag – lead compensator, s = ; wh r > ,0<
< nd
j

Fig. Pole- zero plot of lag-lead compensator

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 108
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

0
0 log

| j | - 20 dB/dec + 20 dB/dec
d
in dB

00

j 0

log

T T T T
Fig. Bode plot of lag – lead compensator

Feedback Compensation
In this method, the compensating element is introduced in feedback path of a control system as
shown.

G(S)

Fig. Block diagram of compensated system with tacho generator feedback.

After compensation, overall open-loop transfer function


Depending on nature of G(S) and K , damping of response can be controlled.
Controllers
A closed loop control system tries to achieve the target output because of the feedback signal.
Many a times, the output response achieved is not smooth and also may have steady state error.
Thus, the transient and steady state response can be improved by using a control action of
transfer function as shown in figure below.

r(t) Gc(s) G(s) c(t)


e(t)

Fig. Usage of controller in a closed loop control system

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 109
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Proportional Controller
Transfer function of a proportional controller is given as, s = K . Proportional controller is
usually an amplifier with gain K . It is used to vary the transient response of the control system.
One cannot determine the steady state response by changing K . Steady state response depends
on the type of the system. However, maximum overshoot is increased in this case.
Integral Controller
Transfer function of a Integral controller is given as, s = K / s. It is used to decrease the
steady state error by increasing the type of the system. However, stability decreases in this case.
Derivative Controller
Transfer function of a derivative controller is given as, s = K . s. It is used to increase the
stability of the system by adding zeros. steady state error increases, as type of the system
decreases in this case.

Proportional + Integral (PI) Controller


Transfer function of PI controller is given as, s = (K + K / s). It is used to decrease the
steady state error without effecting stability, as a pole at origin and a zero are added. In P+I
controller, order of a system increases, i.e. it converts a second order system to third order.
Proportional + Derivative (PD) Controller

Transfer function of a PD controller is given as, s = (K . s + K ). It is used to increase the


stability without effecting the steady state error. Here type of the system is not changed and a
zero is added.

Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PID) Controller


. .
Transfer function of a PID controller is given as, s = (K + K / s + K . s) = ( ).
It is used to decrease the steady state error and to increase the stability as one pole at origin and
two zeros are added. One zero compensates the pole and other zero will increase the stability.
Hence response is faster and highly accurate.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 110
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

4.8: State Variable Analysis

Introduction
The analysis of control system, carried out till now using transfer function approach etc,
assumes that system is initially at rest and system is single input single output (SISO) type.
Hence the state-space approach is used to overcome above disadvantages and this approach is
performed by writing differential equation in time domain and by suitably choosing state
variables.

Advantages of State Variable Analysis


1. This method along with the output gives the information about the state of the system at
some predetermined point along the flow of the state in state space.
2. Used for linear as well as non-linear, time invariant or time varying systems.
3. Analysis of multi-input-multi-output systems is less complex.
4. Analysis is done by considering initial conditions.
5. More accurate than transfer function.
6. Organization of the state variables is easily amendable to the solution through digital
computers.
7. Can be used both for continuous time systems as well as discrete time systems with the
same formulation.

Here u t nd u t are inputs, x t and x t are state variables, y t and y t are outputs.

System

Fig. State variable analysis

State Space Representation


Consider a differential equation,
d x
| 0 | 0

State-space representation of above is obtained as below,


Let and ,
and x .
In matrix form,
x 0 0
[ ] [ ]* + [ ]
x ⁄ ⁄ ⁄

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 111
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Here x t and x t are called state variables. The n dimensional state variables are elements of
n dimensional space called state space.

State Variable: The smallest set of variables, which determine the state of the dynamic system,
are called the state variables.
State: It is the smallest set of state variables, the knowledge of these variable at t = together
with the input completely determines the behavior of the system for any time t > .
State Equation
Consider a system described as below,

(x t ) = ẋ t = x t x t b u t b u t

(x t ) = ẋ t = x t x t b u t b u t

State – space model can be described as below based on above state equation.
ẋ t x t b b u t
[ ] =[ ][ ] + [ ] [ ]
ẋ t x t b b u t
(t) = AX(t) + BU(t)

Where X(t) = State vector,

= Rate of change of state vector,

U(t) = Input vector,


A = System matrix or Evolution matrix
B = Control matrix
Output Equation
For the system described above, let the output equations be
y t = x t x t d u t d u t
y t = x t x t d u t d u t
By representing these in matrix form,
y t x t d d u t
[ ] =[ ][ ] + [ ] [ ]
y t x t d d u t
Y(t) = CX(t) + DU(t)

Where y(t) is output vector,


C is observation matrix
D is transmission matrix

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 112
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Different State – Space Representations

Direct Decomposition
n dir t d omposition, th m trix A is o ush’s ph s v ri bl orm s b low,
0 0 0 ………. 0
0 0 0 ………. 0
0 0 0 ………. 0

0 ………..
0 0 0
[ …………. ………… ]
If , ,……… are eigen values of A, eigen vector matrix, P can be represented as.

……………..
………………
………………
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
[ ]

Cascade Decomposition
Here given system is converted into multiple systems in cascade and direct decomposition is
performed to each of these sub-systems.

Parallel Decomposition
Here the given system transfer function is split into partial fractions first and by considering
direct decomposition of each of the sub-system (partial fraction terms) in parallel, parallel
decomposition can be performed.

State Transition Matrix


The transition matrix is defined as a matrix that satisfies the linear homogeneous state equation.

A t

For t 0, X(t) = [ Sl A ] (0)


t s . 0 = t . 0 where s = S A
Here t = S A is called state transition matrix.

Properties of the State Transition Matrix


Th st t tr nsition m trix ф t poss ss s th ollowing prop rti s
1. ф 0 th id ntity m trix
2. ф t ф -t)
3. [ф t ] ф nt
4. ф t -t ф t -t ф t -t or any t , t , t
5. ф t t ф t ф t

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 113
Quick Refresher Guide Control System

Time Response
Given a state space representation of a control system, the time response for any generic input
and initial conditions contains the following.

Zero Input Response


Only initial conditions are considered and input is considered to be zero.
t 0

Zero State Response


Only input functions are considered and initial conditions are zero.
t [ B U(s)]
Total Response
Total response can be described as,
t ∅ t x 0 (∅ S . U S )

Transfer Matrix of System


Consider a MIMO described by,

Transfer matrix of system is given as G(s) = C


Controllability of Linear Systems
A system is said to be controllable, if there exists an input to transfer the state of system from
any given initial state X(t to any final state X(t ) in a finite time (t t ) 0. The condition of
controllability depends on the coefficient matrices A and B of the system.

Kalman Test for Controllability


For the system to be completely state controllable, it is necessary and sufficient that the
following matrix Qc has a rank n, where n is order of A.
Q = [ B : AB : A B: . . . . . . . . A B]
For the system to be controllable, rank of Q should be n or |Q | 0.

Observability of Linear Systems


A system is said to be observ bl i it’s possibl to g t in orm tion bout st t v ri bl s rom th
measurements of the output and input

Kalman Test for Observability


For the system to be completely observable, it is necessary and sufficient that the following
composite matrix Q0 has a rank of n, where n is order of A.
Q0 = [ A A ...... A ].
For the system to be observable, rank of Q0 should be n or |Q | 0.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 114
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Part – 5: Digital Circuits


5.1: Number Systems & Code Conversions
Characteristics of any number system are:

1. Base or radix is equal to the number of possible symbols in the system


2. The largest value of digit is one (1) less than the radix

Decimal to Binary Conversion:

(a) Integer number: Divide the given decimal integer number repeatedly by 2 and collect the
remainders. This must continue until the integer quotient becomes zero.

(b) Fractional Number: Multiply by 2 to give an integer and a fraction. The new fraction is
multiplied by 2 to give a new integer and a new fraction. This process is continued until the
fraction becomes 0 or until the numbers of digits have sufficient accuracy.

Note: To convert a decimal fraction to a number expressed in base r, a similar procedure is used.
Multiplication is by r instead of 2 and the coefficients found from the integers any range in value
from 0 to (r-1).

The conversion of decimal number with both integer and fraction parts separately and then
combining the answers together.

 Don’t care values or unused states in BCD code are 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110, 1111.
 Don’t care values or unused state in excess – 3 codes are 0000, 0001, 0010, 1101, 1110,
1111.
 The binary equivalent of a given decimal number is not equivalent to its BCD value. Eg.
Binary equivalent of 2510 is equal to 110012 while BCD equivalent is 00100101.
 In signed binary numbers,MSB is always sign bit and the remaining bits are used for
magnitude.
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

Sign Bit Magnitude


 For positive and negative binary number, the sign is respectively ‘0’ and ‘1’.
 Negative numbers can be represented in one of three possible ways.
1. Signed – magnitude representation.
2. Signed – 1’s complement representation.
3. Signed – 2’s complement representation.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 115
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Example: +9 -9

Signed – magnitude 0 0001001 (a) 1 000 1001 signed – magnitude

(b) 1 111 0110 signed – 1’s complement

(c) 1 111 0111 signed – 2’s complement

 Subtraction using 2’s complement: Represent the negative numbers in signed 2’s
complement form, add the two numbers, including their sign bit and discard any carry out of
the most significant bit.
 Since negative numbers are represented in 2’s complement form, negative results also
obtained in signed 2’s complement form.
 The range of binary integer number of n-bits using signed 1’s complement form is given by
+(2 – 1) to –(2 – 1),which includes both types of zero’s i.e., +0 and -0.
 The range of integer binary numbers of n-bits length by using signed 2’s complement
representation is given by + (2 – 1) to – 2n-1 which includes only one type of zero i.e. + 0.
 In weighted codes, each position of the number has specific weight. The decimal value of a
weighted code number is the algebraic sum of the weights of those positions in which 1‘s
appears.
 Most frequently used weighted codes are 8421, 2421 code, 5211 code and 84 2’1’ code.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 116
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.2: Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps


 Boolean properties:
a) Properties of AND function
1. X . 0 = 0 2. 0 . X = 0

3. X . 1 = X 4 .1.X = X

b) Properties of OR function

5. X + 0 = X 6. 0 + X = X

7. X + 1 = 1 8. 1 + X = 1

c) Combining a variable with itself or its complement

9. X .X’ = 0 10. X . X = X

11. X + X = X 12. X + X’ = 1

13. (X’)’ = X

d) Commutative laws: 14. x. y = y. x 15. x+y=y+x


e) Distributive laws: 16. x(y +z) = x.y + x.z 17. x + y. z = ( x+y) (x + z)
f) Associative laws: 18. x(y.z) = (x. y) z 19. x + ( y + z) = (x + y) +z
g) Absorption laws: 20. x + xy= x 21. x(x + y) = x

22. x + x’y = x+ y 23. x(x’ + y) = xy

h) Demorgan’s laws: 24. (x + y)’ = x’ .y’ 25. (x . y)’ = x’ + y’

 Duality principle: It states that every algebraic expression deducible from theorems of
Boolean algebra remains valid if the operators and identify elements are interchanged.
 To get dual of an algebraic function, we simply exchange AND with OR and exchange 1
with 0.
 The dual of the exclusive – OR is equal to its complement.
 To find the complement of a function is take the dual of the function and complement
each literal.
 Maxterm is the compliment of its corresponding minterm and vice versa.
 Sum of all the minterms of a given Boolean function is equal to 1.
 Product of all the maxterms of a given Boolean function is equal to 0

Boolean Algebraic Theorems


Theorem No. Theorem
1. ( + B). ( + B ̅) =
2. B + C = ( + C)(̅ + B)
̅
3. ( + B)(̅ + C) = C + ̅ B
4. B + ̅ C + BC = B + ̅ C
5. ( + B)( + C)(B + C) = ( + B)(̅ + C)
̅
6. ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
. B. C. = ̅ + B ̅ + C̅ +
7. ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
+ B + C + = ̅. B ̅. C̅

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 117
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Karnaugh Maps (K – maps)

 A map is a diagram made up of squares. Each square represents either a minterm or a


maxterms.
 The number of squares in the karnaugh map is given by 2 where n = number of variable.
 Gray code sequence is used in K – map so that any two adjacent cells will differ by only one
bit.
No. of cells
Number of No. of variables No. of literals present
containing 1’s
variables eliminated in the resulting term
grouped
4 2 0
2 1 1
2
1 0 2
8 3 0
4 2 1
3 2 1 2
1 0 3
16 4 0
8 3 1
4 2 2
4
2 1 3
1 0 4

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 118
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.3: Logic Gates


 OR, AND, NOT are basic gates
 NAND and NOR gates are called Universal gates because, by using only NAND gates or by
using only NOR gates we can realize any gate or any circuit.
 EXOR, EXNOR are arithmetic gates.

 There are two types of logic systems


1) Positive level logic system (PLLS) : Out of the given two voltage levels, the more positive
value is assumed as logic ‘1’ and the other as logic ‘0’.
2) Negative level logic system (NLLS):out of the given two voltage levels, the more negative
value is assumed as logic ‘1’ and the other as logic ‘0’.

 NOT gate:-
+VCC
Truth Table Symbol
A Y
A Y=̅
0 1 A
Y=̅
1 0

 AND gate:
Truth Table VCC
A B Y
0 0 0
A
0 1 0
1 0 0 B Y = AB A
1 1 1
Y
B

 OR gate:
A B Y A
0 0 0 Y = A+B
0 1 1 B A
1 0 1
1 1 1 Y

 NAND gate:

A B Y A
0 0 1 B Y = ̅̅̅̅
B
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 119
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 NOR gate:
A B Y A
0 0 1
0 1 0 Y = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
+B
B
1 0 0
1 1 0
 The circuit, which is working as AND gate with positive level logic system, will work as OR
gate with negative level logic system and vice-versa.
 The circuit which is behaving as NAND gate with positive level logic system will behave as
NOR gate with negative level logic system and vice – versa.

 Exclusive OR gate (X– OR): “The output of an X – OR gate is high for odd number of high
inputs”.
A B Y A
0 0 0 Y = A⊕B= B’ + ’B
0 1 1 B
1 0 1
1 1 0

 Exclusive NOR gate (X–NOR): The output is high for odd number of low inputs”. (OR) “The
output is high for even number of high inputs”.
A B Y A
0 0 1
0 1 0 Y = A⨀B= B + ’B’
1 0 0 B
1 1 1

 Realization of Basic gates using NAND and NOR gates:

1. NOT gate NAND NOR


Y = ( . )’ A ( + )’ = ’
A Y=̅ A
=
A Y = ( .1)’ A Y = ( + 0)’
1 = ’ 0 =

2. AND gate
A
A A
B Y =AB Y =AB Y =AB
B

3. OR gate:

A
A A

B Y =A+B Y = A+B B Y = A+ B
B

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 120
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 Realization of NAND gate using NOR gates:

A
A
B Y = ( B)’

Y = ( B)’
B
 Realization of NOR gate using NAND gates:

A A

B Y = ( + B)’
B Y = ( + B)’

 Realization of X – OR gate using NAND and NOR gates:

A
Y = B’+ ’B
B

Y = B’ + ’B
B

A
`

Y = B’ + B

 The minimum number of NAND gates required to realize X – OR gate is four.


 The minimum number of NOR gates required to realize X – OR gate is five.

 Equivalence Properties:
1. (X ⊕Y)’ = X’Y’ + XY = X Y
2. X 0 = X’
3. X 1 = X
4. X X = 1
5. X X’= 0
6. X Y = Y X
7. (X Y)’ = X ⊕ Y

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 121
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Alternate Logic Gate Symbols

4. A bubbled NAND gate is equivalent to OR gate

A A
`
Y=( B) Y = A+B
B B
` =A+B

5. A bubbled NOR gate is equivalent to AND gate

A A
Y=( + B ) =AB `
B Y= B
B
`
6. A bubbled AND gate is equivalent to NOR gate

A A
`
Y= B = ( + B) Y = ( + B)
B B
`
7. A bubbled OR gate is equivalent to NAND gate

A A
Y= + B =( B) `
B Y = ( B)
B
`

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 122
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.4: Logic Gate Families


 Fan- Out: “The number of standard loads that the output of the gate can drive without
disturbing its normal operation’’.
 Fan-In: “The maximum number of inputs that can be applied to the logic gate’’.
 Noise Margin: “It is the limit of a noise voltage which may be present without impairing the
proper operation of the circuit’’ NM = and NM = .
 Figure of Merit: The product of propagation delay time and power dissipation.
 Saturation Logic: A form of logic gates in which one output state is the saturation voltage
level of the transistor. Example: RTL, DTL, TTL.
 Unsaturated Logic or Current Mode Logic: A form of logic with transistors operated outside
the saturation region. Example: CML or ECL.

 Voltage Parameters of the Digital IC:

: This is the minimum input voltage which is recognized by the gate as logic 1.
: This is the maximum input voltage which is recognized by the gate as logic 0.
: This is the minimum voltage available at the output corresponding to the logic 1.
VOL: This is the maximum voltage available at the output corresponding to logic 0.

 Passive Pull- up: In a bipolar logic circuit, a resistance used in the collector circuit of the
output transistor is known as passive pull-up.

 Active Pull-up: In a bipolar logic circuit, a BJT and diode circuit used in the collector circuit of
the output transistor instead of is known as active pull-up. This facility is available is TTL
family.
 The advantages of active pull- up over passive- pull up are increased speed of operation and
reduced power dissipation.
 In TTL logic gate family, three different types of output type configurations are available:
they are open collector output type, Totem-pole output type and tri-state output type.
 The advantages of open-collector output are wired-logic can be performed and loads other
than the normal gates can be used.
 The tri- state logic devices are used in bus oriented systems.
 If any input of TTL circuit is left floating, it will function as if it is connected to logic 1 level.
 If any unused input terminal of a MOS gate is left unconnected, a large voltage may get
induced at the unconnected input which may damage the gate.

 Comparison of Different Logic Gate families

DTL TTL ECL CMOS PMOS


Fan-out 8 10 25 50 20
Propagation Delay 30n sec 10nsec. 4nsec. 70 nsec. 300 sec
Power Dissipation 8mW 10mW 40mW 0.01mW 0.2 -10mW
Noise Margin(min.) 700mV 400mV 200mV 300mV 150mV

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 123
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 Gates with open collector output can be used for wired AND operation
VCC

A
̅̅̅̅. ̅̅̅̅ = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
+
B

C
D

 Open emitter output is available in ECL. Wired – OR operation is possible with ECL circuits.
A
B

( + + + )=( + )( + )
C

stream Video of Nayanthara and Simbu


www.http://yahoo.com/

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 124
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.5: Combinational Digital Circuits


Digital circuits can be classified into two types:
o Combinational digital circuits and
o Sequential digital circuits.

Combinational Digital Circuits: In these circuits “the outputs at any instant of time depends
on the inputs present at that instant only.”
For the design of Combinational digital circuits, basic gates (AND, OR, NOT) or universal
gates (NAND, NOR) are used. Examples for combinational digital circuits are adder, decoder
etc.

Sequential Digital Circuits: The outputs at any instant of time not only depend on the present
inputs but also on the previous inputs or outputs. For the design of these circuits in addition
to gates we need one more element called flip-flop. Examples for sequential digital circuits
are Registers, Shift register, Counters etc.

Half Adder: A combinational circuit that performs the addition of two bits is called a half-
adder.

Sum = X ⊕ Y = XY’ + X’ Y Carry = XY

Half Subtractor: It is a Combinational circuit that subtracts two bits and produces their
difference.
Diff. = X ⊕ Y = XY’ + X’Y Borrow = X’ Y
Half adder can be converted into half subtractor with an additional inverter.

Full Adder: It performs sum of three bits (two significant bits and a previous carry) and
generates sum and carry.
Sum=X⊕ ⊕Z Carry = XY + YZ + ZX

Full adder can be implemented by using two half adders and an OR gate.

X Sum
Y H.A. H.A.

Z
Carry

Full subtractor: It subtracts one bit from the other by taking pervious borrow into account
and generates difference and borrow.
Diff.=X⊕ ⊕Z Borrow = X’Y + YZ + ZX’

 Full subtractor can be implemented by using two half- subtractors and an OR gate.

X Diff.
Y H.S. H.S.

Z Borr.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 125
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Multiplexers (MUX)

 It selects binary information from one of many input lines and directs it to a single output
line
 The selection of a particular input line is controlled by a set of selection lines
 There are 2 input lines where ‘n’ is the select lines i/p then n = log M

2 : 1 MUX
I
2:1
Y Y=S̅I + SI
MUX
I

4 : 1 MUX
S1 S0 Y
I
0 0 I
I 4:1 0 1 I
I Y
MUX 1 0 I
I 1 1 I

S1 S0

Y=S̅ S̅ I + S̅ S I + S S̅ I + S S I

 Decoder:

Decoder is a combinational circuit that converts binary information from ‘n’ input lines to a
maximum of 2 unique output lines.

Truth table of active high output type of decoder.

X Y D D D D
X
0 0 1 0 0 0
2 4
0 1 0 1 0 0 Y

1 0 0 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 1

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 126
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 Encoder
 Encoder is a combinational circuit which has many inputs and many outputs
 It is used to convert other codes to binary such as octal to binary, hexadecimal to binary
etc.
 Clocked S-R Flip-flop: It is called set reset flip-flop.
Pr
No change S Q
Reset set Clk
0 0 Forbidden R
0 1 0 Cr
1 0 1 Q = S +R Q

1 1 *

PRESET

S Q

Clk

R Q’

CLEAR
 S and R inputs are called synchronous inputs. Preset (pr) and Clear (Cr) inputs are called
direct inputs or asynchronous inputs.
 The output of the flip-flop changes only during the clock pulse. In between clock pulses the
output of the flip flop does not change.
 During normal operation of the flip flop, preset and clear inputs must be always high.
 The disadvantage of S-R flip-flop is S=1, R=1 output cannotbe determined. This can be
eliminated in J-K flip-flop.
 S-R flip flop can be converted to J-K flip-flop by using the two equation S=JQ’ and R= KQ.

J Q
S Pr Q
J
Q’
Clk Clk
R Q’ K Q’
Q Cr
K

Q = JQ + K Q

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 127
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

Truth table

0 0

0 1 0

1 0 1

1 1

 Race around problem is present in the J-K flip flop, when both J=K=1.
 Toggling the output more than one time during the clock pulse is called Race around
Problem.
 The race around problem in J-K flip-flop can be eliminated by using edge triggered flip-flop
or master slave J-K flip flop or by the clock signal whose pulse width is less than or equal to
the propagation delay of flip-flop.
 Master-slave flip-flop is a cascading of two J-K flip-flops Positive or direct clock pulses are
applied to master and these are inverted and applied to the slave flip-flop.

D-Flip-Flop: It is also called a Delay flip-flop. By connecting an inverter in between J and K input
terminals. D flip-flop is obtained.
Truth table

J
D Q Q
D Clk
0 0
K Q’
1 1

T Flip-flop: J K flip-flop can be converted into T- Flip-flop by connecting J and K input terminals
to a common point. If T=1, then Q n+1 = Q . This unit changes state of the output with each clock
pulse and hence it acts as a toggle switch.

Truth table

T Q T J
Q
0 Q
Clk
1 Q
K Q’

 Ring Counter: Shift register can be used as ring counter when Q0 output terminal is
connected to serial input terminal.
 An n-bit ring counter can have “n” different output states. It can count n-clock pulses.
 Twisted Ring counter: It is also called Johnson’s Ring counter. It is formed when Q output
terminal is connected to the serial input terminal of the shift register.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 128
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 An n-bit twisted ring counter can have maximum of 2n different output states.

Counters:-
 The counter is driven by a clock signal and can be used to count the number of clock
cycles counter is nothing but a frequency divider circuit.
 Two types of counters are there:
(i) Synchronous (ii) Asynchronous
 Synchronous counters are also called parallel counters. In this type clock pulses are
applied simultaneously to all the flip – flops
 Asynchronous counters are also called ripple or serial counter. In this type of counters
the output of one flip – flop is connected to the clock input of next flip – flop and soon.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 129
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.6: AD /DA Convertor


 There are two types of DACs available
a) Binary weighted resistor type of DAC and
b) R – 2 R ladder type of DAC

 The advantage of R – 2R ladder type of DAC over Binary weighted type of DAC
a) Better linearity and
b) It requires only two different types of resistors with values R and 2R.

 The percentage resolution of n – bit DAC is given by 100


 The resolution of an n –bit DAC with a range of output from 0 to V volts is given by Volts
 Different types of DC’s are available:
 Simultaneous ADC or parallel comparator of Flash type of ADC
 Counter type ADC or pulse width type of ADC
 Integrator type of ADC or single slope of ADC
 Dual slope integrator ADC
 Successive approximation type ADC etc.
 Flash type of ADC is the faster type of ADC, An n – bit Flash type ADC requires 2 – 1
comparators.
 Dual slope ADC is more accurate.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 130
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.7: Semiconductor Memory


The capacity of a memory IC is represented by 2 m, where ‘2 ’ represents number of
memory locations available and ‘m’ represents number of bits stored in each memory
location.
Example:- 2 8 = 1024 8
To increase the bit capacity or length of each memory location, the memory ICs are
connected in parallel and the corresponding memory location of each IC must be selected
simultaneously. Eg. 1024 × 8 memory capacity can be obtained by using 4 ICs of memory
capacity 1024×2.

Types of Memories:
Memories

Semiconductor Memories Magnetic Memories

Drum Tape Disk Bubble Core

Read/Write Memory (RAM or Read Only Memory (ROM)


user memory)

PROM EPROM EEPROM


Static RAM Dynamic RAM

 Volatile Memory: The stores information is dependent on power supply i.e., the stored
information will remain as long as power is applied. Eg. RAM

 Non- Volatile Memory: The stored information is independent of power supply i.e., the stored
information will present even if the power fails. Eg: ROM, PROM, EPROM, EEPROM etc.

 Static RAM (SRAM): The binary information is stored in terms of voltage. SRAMs stores ones
and zeros using conventional Flip-flops.

 Dynamic RAM (DRAM): The binary information is stored in terms of charge on the capacitor.
The memory cells of DRAMs are basically charge storage capacitors with driver transistors.
Because of the leakage property of the capacitor, DRAMs require periodic charge refreshing
to maintain data storage.
 The package density is more in the case of DRAMs. But additional hardware is required for
memory refresh operation.
 SRAMs consume more power when compared to DRAMs. SRAMS are faster than DRAMs.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 131
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

5.8: Introduction to Microprocessors


 8085 Microprocessor is a 40 pin IC, requires +5V single power supply.
 Address Bus width of 8085 is 16-bit. Its addressing capacity is 216=65,536=64K (1K=1024)
 Low order address Bus A0-A7 is multiplexed with data bus D0-D7
 Maximum clock frequency of 8085 microprocessor is 3.07 MHz.
 Crystal frequency of 8085 processor is 6.144 MHz. It is always double to that of clock
frequency.
 It supports five hardware Interrupts and eight software Interrupts.
 8085 supports five status flags: Sign (S), Zero (Z), Auxiliary Carry (Ac), Parity (P) and Carry
(Cy).
 It consists of two 16-bit address registers: Program Counter (PC) and Stack Pointer register
(SP).
 PC always holds address of next memory location to be accessed.
 SP always holds address of the top of the stack.
 8085 consists of six 8-bit general purpose registers which are accessible to the programmer:
B, C, D, E, H and L. They can also be used as three register pairs: BC, DE and HL.
 ALE (Address Latch Enable) signal is used to latch low order 8 – bit address present on AD0
– AD7 into external latches
 HOLD and HLDA signals are used for DMA (Direct Memory Access) operation.
 READY signal is used by the microprocessor to communicate with slow operating
peripherals.
 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
RESET IN is chip reset which is active low signal
 8085 uses S0 and S1 signals to indicate the current status of the processor.
S1 S0 Status
0 0 Halt
0 1 Write
1 0 Read
1 1 Fetch
 By Combining the status signal IO/M ̅ with control signals RD̅̅̅̅ and ̅̅̅̅̅
R we can generate four
different signals
IO/M̅ ̅̅̅̅
RD ̅̅̅̅̅
R Operation
0 0 1 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
MEMR
0 1 0 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
MEM
1 0 1 ̅̅̅̅̅
IOR
1 1 1 ̅̅̅̅̅̅
IO
 DMA is having highest priority over all the interrupts
Interrupts Type Instruction Hardware Trigger Vector

TRAP Nonmaskable Independent No external Level & Edge 0024


of EI & DI Hardware sensitive
RST 7.5 Maskable Controlled by No external Edge 003C
EI & DI; Hardware sensitive
Unmasked by
SIM
RST 6.5 Maskable Controlled by No external Level 0034
EI & DI; Hardware sensitive
Unmasked by
SIM

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 132
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

RST 5.5 Maskable Controlled by No external Level 002C


EI & DI; Hardware sensitive
Unmasked by
SIM
INTR Maskable Controlled by
RST Code Level 0000 to 0038
EI & DI
from external sensitive
Hardware
 Accumulator register content and status register content together is called PSW (Program
Status Word or Processor Status Word) with Accumulator as Upper byte.

 Data Transfer Instructions: These instructions are used to transfer data from register to
register, register to memory or from memory to register. No flags will be affected for these
instructions. r1, r2 r can be any one out of B, C, D, E, H, L, A and rp can be any one of 3 register
pairs BC, DE & HL.
MOV r1, r2 ( r1 ) ← ( r2 )
( r ) ← (M) or ( r ) ←((HL))
MOV r, M
( M ) ← ( r ) or ((HL)) ← ( r)
MOV M, r
( r/M ) ← ( 8 – bit data ) d8
MVI ( r/M ), d8
Rp ← 16 – bit rp = BC, DE,
L XI rp, 16 – bit HL or SP

LDA 16 – bit address

STA 16 – bit address

LHLD 16 – bit address

SHLD 16 – bit address

LD Xr
} rp can be either BC or DE pair
ST Xr
(HL) ←→ (DE)
XCHG
(PC) ←→ (HL)
PCHL

 Arithmetic Instructions: This group consists of addition, subtraction, increment and


decrement operations. 8085 microprocessor does not support multiplication and division
instructions

ADD r (A)(A)+(A)

ADD M (A)(A)+(M)

ADI d8 (A)(A)+d8

ADC r (A)(A)+(r)+Cy

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 133
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

ADC M (A)(A)+(M)+Cy

ACI d8 (A)(A)+d8+Cy

SUB r (A)(A)-(r)

SUB M (A)(A)-(M)

SUI d8 (A)(A)-d8

SBB r (A)(A)-(r)-Cy

SBB M (A)(A)-(M)-Cy

SBI d8 (A)(A)-d8-Cy

INR r (r)(r)+1

INR M (M)(M)+1

INX rP (rP)(rP)+1 (rp=BC, DE, HL or SP)

DCR r (r)(r)-1

DCR M (M)(M)-1

DCX rp (rp)(rp)-1 (rp=BC, DE, HL or SP)

DAD rP (HL)(HL)+(rP) (rP=BC, DE, HL or SP)

DAA

 In 8085, the service of AC flag is used by only one instruction. It is DAA.


 For INX and DCX instructions, no flags is affected
 Following table shows the list of flags affected for different instructions
Instruction S Z Ac P Cy
Yes Yes Yes Yes No
INR, DCR
No No No No Yes
DAD
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ADD, ADC, SUB, SBB, DAA

 Logical Instructions: This group consists of AND, OR, NOT, XOR, Compare and Rotate
operations
ORA r (A)(A) V (r)
ORA M (A)(A) V (M)
ORI d8 (A)(A) V d8

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 134
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

ANA r (A)( ) ∧ (r)


ANA M (A)( ) ∧ (M)
ANI d8 (A)( ) ∧ (d8)
XRA r (A)( ) ∀ (r)
XRA M (A)( ) ∀ (M)
XRI d8 (A)( ) ∀ d8
CMP r ( )⋛ (r)
CMP M ( )⋛ (M)
CPI d8 ( )⋛ d8
CMA (A)( )
CMC Cy
STC Cy1
RLC Rotate accumulator left
RAL Rotate accumulator left through carry
RRC Rotate accumulator right
RAR Rotate accumulator right through carry

 Following table shows how flags affected for different logical instructions

Instruction S Z Ac P Cy

ANA Yes Yes 1 Yes 0

ORA, XRA Yes Yes 0 Yes 0

RLC, RRC, RAL, RAR, STC, CMC No No No No Yes

CMP, CPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

 Branch Instructions: These are also called program control transfer instruction. These are
two types: Un conditional branch and Conditional branch instructions
 No flags will be affected for branch instructions

 Unconditional Branch Instructions


JMP 16-bit address
CALL 16-bit address
RET
RST n (n=0 to 7)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 135
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

 Conditional branch instruction

Jump Instructions Call Instructions Return Instruction Condition

J Z 16 – Bit addr CZ 16 – bit addr RZ If Z =1

JNZ 16 – bit addr CNZ 16 – bit addr RNZ If Z = 0

JC 16 –bit addr CC 16 – bit addr RC If Cy = 1

JNC 16 – bit addr CNC 16 – bit addr RNC If Cy = 0

JP 16 – bit addr Cp 16 - bit addr RP If S = 0

JM 16 – bit addr CM 16 – bit addr RM If S = 1

JPO 16 – bit addr CPO 16 – bit addr RPO If P = 0

JPE 16 – bit addr CPE 16 – bit addr RPE If P = 1

 Machine Control, Stack and IO related Instructions: No Flags affected for these instructions.
 Machine Control: EI, DI, SIM, RIM , NOP, HLT
 Stack related : PUSH rp (rp = BC<DE<HL )
PUSH PSW
POP rp
POP PSW
LXI SP, 16 – bit addr
SPHL

 IO Related: IN 8 – IN 8 – bit Port address


OUT 8 – bit Port address

 Whenever PUSH instruction is executed SP register content is decremented by 2.


 Whenever POP instruction is executed SP register content is incremented by 2.
 When CALL instruction (conditional or unconditional) or RST instruction is executed, SP
register content is decremented by 2,
 When RET instruction (Conditional or Unconditional ) is executed, SP register content is
incremented by 2, because it retrieves top two locations of the stack and load into PC

Addressing Modes: The way in which the operand information is specified in the instruction code
is called addressing mode. The 8085 microprocessor supports five addressing modes.

1. Implied or Implicit or Inherent Addressing Mode: There are certain instructions which
operate on the content of the accumulator. Such instructions do not require the address of
the operand. Eg: CMA, STC, RLC, RRC, RAL, RAR etc.

2. Direct Addressing Mode: In this mode the address of the operand (data) is given in the
instruction itself. Eg: STA, LDA, SHLD, LHLD, IN, OUT etc.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 136
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

3. Register Addressing Mode: In this mode the operands are in the general purpose registers.
The operation code specifies the address of the register in addition to the operation to the
performed. Eg: MOV A,B; ADDB; SUB C; ORA B ; etc.

4. Register Indirect Addressing Mode: In this mode the address of the operand is specified by a
register pair. Eg: LXI, STAZ, LDAX etc.

5. Immediate Addressing Mode: In this mode the operand is specified in the instructions itself.
Eg: MVI, ADI, LXI, ORI, SUI, SBI, ACI, XRI,ANI etc

 Each instruction cycle of the 8085 microprocessor can be divided into a few basic operations
called machine cycles, and each machine cycle can be divided into T-states.

 Machine Cycle: It is defined as the time required completing the operation of accessing either
memory or I/O. In the 8085, the machine cycle may consist of three to six T-states.
 T-state is defined as one sub-division of the operation performed in one clock-period.
 The time required to complete the execution of an instruction is called instruction cycle.
 The first machine cycle of 8085 consists of four to six T-states and all other subsequent
machine cycles consist of three T-states only.
 Types of machine cycle of 8085: Op code fetch cycle, memory read cycle, memory write
cycle, I/O read cycle, I/O write cycle, Interrupt acknowledge machine cycle and Bus idle
machine cycle.
 The first machine cycle of each instruction cycle is always Op Code fetch machine cycle.
 In 8085, CALL instruction is the lengthy instruction which takes 18-T states and the shortest
instruction takes only 4-T states (Ex: MOV A,B)

 Memory Mapping: Assigning address to memory locations is called memory mapping.

 Absolute Decoding: In this decoding all the address lines which are not used for memory
chip to identify a memory register must be decoded.

 Linear Decoding: In this decoding technique there is one address line for CS. This technique
reduces hardware, but generates multiple addresses resulting in fold memory space.

 I/O Devices Can be Connected to Microprocessor in Two Different Techniques.


1 Memory mapped I/O technique and
2 I/O mapped or peripheral mapped I/O technique

Memory Mapped I/O Technique

 In memory mapped I/O, the I/O devices are also treated as memory locations , under that
assumption they will be given 16- bit address.
 In memory mapped I/O, microprocessor uses memory related instructions to communicate
with I/O devices Eg: STA, LDA , MOV A,M; MOV B, M etc,
 In memory mapped I/O , MEMR and MEM control signals are used to activate I/O devices.
 In memory mapped I/O the entire memory map is shared by memory locations and I/O
devices one address can be used only once. This technique is used in a system where the
number of I/O devices are less.
 The maximum numbers of I/O devices that can be connected to microprocessor in this
technique are 65536.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 137
Quick Refresher Guide Digital Circuits

I/O Mapped I/O Technique

 In this technique the I/O devices are identified by the microprocessor with separate 8-bit
port address.
 This technique uses separate control signals (IOR and IO ) to activate I/O devices and
separate (IN and OUT) to communicate with I/O devices.
 In the technique I/O mapping is independent of memory mapping, same address can be used
to identify input device and output device.
 This technique is used in a system where number of I/O devices are more by using this
method a maximum of 256 input devices and 256 output devices can be connected to the
processor (total of 512I/O devices).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 138
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Part – 6: Analog Circuits

6.1: Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application

C
High Pass Circuit + +

Vi R Vo

- -

(a) Step Input ( )


V
() ( )e

here Vf = 0, Vi = V, Vo(t) = Ve
Where
0
()
(b) Pulse Input: () [ () ( )]
V

1) e e 1

( )
2) e

0
2
(c) Square Wave Input

Case 1: The I/P and O/P are shown below.

(a)

Average voltage

Zero voltage

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 139
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

(b)

V0

A1 Zero voltage
V
0 A2 t

T1 T2 T1

Fig: (a) Square wave input; (b) Output voltage if the time constant is very large (compared with
T). The dc component V d –c of the output is always zero. Area A1 equals area A2.

Case 2: he e ei h e
V0
Input

0 t

T1 T2

Fig: Peaking of a square wave resulting from a time constant small compared with T.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 140
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

More generally the response to a square


wave must have the appearance shown e
below:

The four levels V1, V1’ 2,V2’ can be


determined from figure (a)
t
e

e e ( )

For symmetrical square wave:

T1 = T2 = T/2 fig ( )
Output
figInput
( )

V1 = -V2, V1’ -V2 and the response is shown


in figure (b)

Pe ce ge i ‘P’ i defi ed y t

P= 100 100 %

= 100 % Where f1 = and = 1 / T


fig ( )

Fig: Linear tilt of a square wave when RC/T > > 1


(d) Ramp Input

Vi(t) = t u (t) and Vo(t) = (1 e ), are shown below,

Input =
Signal

Deviation from Linearity Output


Output

0 t t
T 0 T
Fig (a)
Fig (b)

Fig. (a) Response of a high pass RC circuit to a ramp voltage for RC / T >> 1;
(b)Response to a ramp voltage for RC / T << 1.

For t<< departure from linearity, transmission error, et is e e f

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 141
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Low Pass Filter


(a) Step Input
R

() ()

() ( e ), f

(b) Pulse Input

( )

Fig. Pulse response of the low – pass RC circuits. Fig. Pulse response for the case

(c) Square Wave Input

( )e

( )e ( )

(A)
V’

T
V V Average voltage
T1 T2

V’’ Vd-c
0 t

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 142
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

(B) ’

0.9V
0.1V Vd-c
9 ’’
9

Tr
0 t

(C)

V2 ’
V2
V01 V02
Vd-c
’ V1 ’’
V1

0 t
(D)

V2 V2

V1 V1 Vd-c

0 t

Fig. (a) Square – wave input; (b - d) output of the low – pass RC circuit. The time constant is
smallest for (b) and largest for (d).

(d) Ramp Input

Vi = Vi

RC
Vo
Vo
t 0 t
0
T T
(a) (b)

Fig. Response of a low – pass RC circuit to a ramp voltage (a) RC /T < < 1; (b) RC / T > > 1.

( e )e f

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 143
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Clamping Networks:

V0
vi
V + C +
0 t
R V0
T t
2V
- -
-V -2V

V0
+ C +

Vi R V0
2V

0 t

V
0
+ C +
V
10
Vi R V0 t
V 2V
- 1 -

V0
+ C +

Vi R V0 0 t
V -Vi
- 1 -
2V

V0
+ +
C

Vi R V0
V1
- -
2V
0 t
-V1

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 144
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Parameter Half-Wave Full-Wave Bridge


Ripple frequency fs 2fs 2fs
(f )

PIV Vm 2Vm Vm

Im Vm/(Rf +RL) Vm/(Rf +RL) Vm/(2Rf +RL)

Average Im 2Im 2Im


current(Idc)

R.M.S value (Irms) Im/2 Im/√ Im/√

D.C. voltage (Vdc) Vm - Idc Rf 2Vm - Idc Rf 2Vm -2 Idc Rf

Form factor(F) 1.57 1.11 1.11

Ripple factor(r) 1.21 0.482 0.482

Pdc RL RL RL

Pi (Rf + RL) (Rf + RL) (Rf + RL)

Efficiency( r) % % %
( ) ( ) ( )

Regulation

fs = a.c input supply frequency, PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage)=the maximum voltage to which the
diode is subjected in a rectifier circuit
( ∫ d ( ∫ d )
Vdc = Idc RL, Form factor, F = Irm/Idc ) = RMS value of the ac components of current =
(√ – )0.5
i ef c ’rms / Idc ’rms / Vdc = √
( )
= Efficiency of Rectification = P / Pi, Regulation =

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 145
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.2: DC Biasing-BJTs
VBE: decreases about 7.5 mV per degree Celsius (0C) increase temperature.

ICO (reverse saturation current): doubles in value for every 100C increase in temperature.

IC = f (ICO, VBE β)

β β
β

Biasing Type Operating Point

Stability
Factor

Fixed Bias Circuit β β

Fixed Bias Circuit With Emitter


Resistor ( + ) β
(β )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 146
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Collector To Base Biasing


Circuit β

Self Bias Circuit


( ) h β β
β

Type Symbol Input Resistance


Basic Relationships and Capacitance
JFET
(n-channel)
D > MΩ
Ci: (1-10)
G
S

( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 147
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

MOSFET
Depletion-type
(n-channel) D
G R> Ω
S Ci: (1-10)

( )

MOSFET
Enhancement-type
(n-channel)
D
R> MΩ
G Ci: (1-10)
S
( ( ))

( )
K=
( ( ) ( ))

Type Configuration Pertinent Equations


JFET
Fixed-bias

JFET
Self-bias

( )

JFET
Voltage-divider bias

( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 148
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

JFET
Common-gate

( )

JFET
( ) ( )
( )

JFET
( )

Depletion-type
MOSFET
*(All configurations above
plus cases where
+voltage) Fixed-bias

Depletion-type
MOSFET
Voltage-divider Bias
( )

Enhancement-type
MOSFET
Feedback
configuration

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 149
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Enhancement-type
MOSFET
Voltage-divider bias

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 150
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.3: Small Signal Modeling Of BJT and FET

Configuration =

Fixed-bias (JFET or D-MOSFET) High ( MΩ) Medi m ( kΩ) Medium (-10)


= g ( )
=
g
Port ( )
( )

System

Self-bias bypassed (JFET or D-MOSFET) High( MΩ) Medi m ( kΩ) Medium (-10)
= = g ( )
= = g
( )
( )
Port g ( )

System g

Self-bias unbypassed Rs (JFET or D-MOSFET) High( MΩ) Medi m ( kΩ) Low(-2)


= g
g g

= =

( ( )) ( ( ))

Voltage-divider bias(JFET or D MOSFET) High ( MΩ) Medi m ( kΩ) Medium (-10)


g ( )

( ) g

( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 151
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Source Follower(JFET or D-MOSFET) High( MΩ) L ( MΩ) Low (<1)


= = g g ( )
= g g ( )
( )

( )

Common Gate L ( Ω) Medi m ( kΩ) Medium (+10)


g

g ( )

= = g

( ) ( )

Drain Feedback bias E-MOSFET Medi m ( MΩ) Medi m ( kΩ) Medium (-10)
= g ( )
g ( ) g
( )
g ( )
( )

Voltage Divider bias E-MOSFET Medi m ( MΩ) Medi m ( MΩ) Medium (-10)
= g ( )
g

( ) ( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 152
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Configuration =

( ) β

h
( ) h
h
Including
+ ( ) β
~
-

( ) β

( ) h
+

~ Including
-
( ) β

1
1
Including β( +
)
( )
β
(h h )
+ h
β( + ( )
h
-
~ )

( )
β

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 153
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

( )
+
~
-
( ) h

Including

( )

( ) β( +
)

( )
+ (h +
h )
-
~ Including

( )
β( +
)

( ) β( + )

(h +
( ) h )
+

- ~
Including

( ) β( + )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 154
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

( )
β

( ) h
+
Including
- ~ β
( )

( )
β

( )
h
+
~
Including
- β
( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 155
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.4: Operational Amplifiers and Their Applications


An ideal op amp circuit would have infinite input impedance, zero output impedance and an
infinite voltage gain.

Above equation for gain is valid only if open loop gain is infinity, if gain is not infinite always use
exact equation. Above equation is valid only if output is feedback to negative terminal at the
input.

If output is feedback to positive terminal, then output will go to saturation and above equation
f g i d e ’ y

The fact that io e d he c ce h he m ifie i he e exi i h


circuit or virtual ground. The concept of a virtual short implies that although the voltage is
nearly 0V, there is no current through that amplifier input to ground. Current only goes through
resistors and

io tends to zero as gain tends to infinity. io will be small if gain is finite.

Since any signals applied to an op-amp in general have both in-phase and out of phase
components, the resulting output can be expressed as
= +
Where
= different voltage

= common voltage

= differential gain of the amplifier

= common-mode gain of the amplifier

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 156
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Inverting Amplifier

0𝛀

~ ~

Feedback
circuit

The output is obtained by multiplying the input by a fixed or constant gain, set by the input
resistor( ) and feedback resistor ( ) this output also being inverted from the input.

Non-Inverting Amplifier

= =1+

Offset Currents and Voltages

The output offset voltage can be affected by two separate circuit conditions. These are: (1) an
input offset voltage, and (2) an offset current due to the difference in currents resulting at
the plus(+) and minus(-) inputs.

( ) =

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 157
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

0𝛀

Feedback
circuit

Input Bias Current,


A parameter related to and the separate input bias currents and is the average bias
current defined as

>

Gain Band Width: Because of the compensation circuits included in an op amp, the voltage gain
drops off as frequency increases. A frequency of interest is where the gain drops by 3dB, this
being the cutoff frequency of the op-amp, f . The unity gain frequency f and cutoff frequency are
related by
f = f = gain x BW
where is differential voltage gain
It should be noted that gain bandwidth product of op-amp remains constant whether it is open
loop or feedback amplifier. If gain is decreased, bandwidth increases and vice-versa.

f e e cy ( g c e)
f

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 158
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Maximum Signal Frequency: Let = K sin2 ft. The maximum voltage rate of change can be
shown to be signal maximum rate of change 2 fK V/s. To prevent distortion at the output the
rate of change must also be less than the slew rate, i.e,

2 fK SR rad/sec

Slew Rate, SR is maximum rate at which amplifier output can change in volts per µs.

SR = V/µs

Differential Inputs: when separate inputs are applied to the op-amp, resulting difference signal is
the difference between the two points.

= -

Common Inputs: When both input signals are the same a common signal element due to the two
inputs can be defined as the average of the sum of the two signals.

= ( )

Output Voltage: Since any signals applied to an op-amp in general have both in-phase and out of
phase components, the resulting output can be expressed as

= +

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio:

CMRR = , CMRR(log) = 20 log10

Negative feedback creates a condition of equilibrium (balance). Positive feedback creates a


condition of hysteresis (the tendency to "latch" in one of two extreme states).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 159
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.5: Feedback and Oscillator Circuits Feedback Amplifiers

Signal or Type of Feedback


Ratio Voltage Series Current Series Current Shunt Voltage Shunt

Voltage Current Current Voltage


Voltage Voltage Current Current
A
β ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄

Parameter Type of Feedback (Effect of –ve Feedback)


Voltage Series Current Series Current Shunt Voltage Shunt

Decreases Increases Increases Decreases

Increases Increases Decreases Decreases

Improve Voltage Transconductance Current amplifier Transresistance


characteristics of. amplifier amplifier amplifier

Desensitizes

Bandwidth Increases Increases Increases Increases

Nonlinear Decreases Decreases Decreases Decreases


distortion

Parameter Voltage Current Shunt Voltage Shunt Current Series


Series
1.Output signal Voltage Current Voltage Current

2.Input signal Voltage Current Current Voltage

3.Basic amplifier Voltage Current Trans resistance Transconductance

4.A(with out feedback) AV=V0/Vi AI =I0/Ii Rm=V0/Ii Gm=I0/VI

5. Vf/V0 If / I0 If / V 0 Vf/I0

6.D=1+A 1+AV 1+AI 1+Rm 1+Gm

7.Af AV/D AI/D Rm/D Gm/D

8.Rif RiD Ri/D Ri/D RiD

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 160
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

9.Rof RO/D RO.D RO/D ROD

10.f1f f1/D f1/D f1/D f1/D

11.f2f f2.D f2.D f2.D f2.D

12.BWf

13.df(distortion) =d/D =d/D =d/D =d/D

14.Noise Decreases Decreases Decreases Decreases

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 161
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.6: Power Amplifiers

Amplifier Type
Parameter Voltage Current Trans Trans resistance
Conductance
0 0
0 0
Transfer characteristic
Class A: The output signal varies for a full 3600 of the cycle this requires the Q- point to be
biased at a level so that at least half the signal swing of the output may vary up and swing down
without going to a high enough voltage to be approach the lower supply level.
Class B: A class B circuit provides an output signal varying over one-half the output signal cycle,
or for 1800. Here the dc bias is at cut off (zero current) so, the output is not a faithful
reproduction of the input as only half cycle is present. Two class B operations, one to provide
output on the positive-output half cycle and another output to provide operation on the
negative-output half cycle are necessary. This type of connection is referred to as push-pull
operation.
Class AB: An amplifier may be biased at a dc level above the zero base current level of class B and
above one – half the supply voltage level of class. This bias condition is class AB. For class AB
operation the output signal swing occurs between 1800 and 3600 and is neither class A nor class
B operation.
Class C: The output of a class C amplifier is biased for operation at less than 180 0 of the cycle and
will operate only with a tuned (resonant) circuit which provides a full cycle of operation for the
tuned or resonant frequency
Class D: This operating class is a form of amplifier operation using pulse signals which are on for
a short interval and off for a longer interval. The major advantage of class D operation is that
amplifier is on only for short intervals and the overall efficiency can practically be very high.
Amplifier Efficiency: defined as the ratio of o/p power to i/p power , improves (gets higher)
going from class A to class D.
P ( )
x
P( )

P ( ) = (rms) (rms) = (rms) = (rms)/

Where (rms) = (peak)/√


Peak – to Peak Signals : The ac power delivered to the load may be expressed using
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
P ( )

The maximum efficiency of a class A circuit, occurring for the largest output voltage and current
swings, is only 25% with a direct or series fed load connection and 50% with a transformer
connection to the load. Class B operation, with no dc bias power for no input signal, reaches
78.5%. Class D operation can achieve power efficiency over 90% and provide the most efficient
operation of all the operating classes. Since class AB falls between class A and class B in bias, it
also falls between their efficiency rating between 25% (or 50%) and 78.5%

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 162
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Amplifier Distortion

%THD = D = √ . . . . . . . . 100%

The total power can also be expressed in terms of THD, i.e.,

P = (1 . . . . . . .) = (1 + ) P1

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 163
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

6.7: BJT and JFET Frequency Response

At low frequencies we shall find that the coupling and bypass capacitors can no longer be
replaced by the short circuit approximation because of the increase in reactance of these
elements. The frequency – dependent parameters of the small signal equivalent circuits and the
stray capacitive elements associated with the active device and the network will limit the high –
frequency response of the system.

Miller Effect Capacitance

A V= /
_

Miller Input Capacitance

c (1- )

Miller output Capacitance

=( )

Multistage Frequenct Effects, For n stages

Lower cut-off frequency is =√

Upper cut-off frequency is √( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 164
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Phase Shift Oscillator Transistor Hartley oscillator

C C C
D +
+

G
S
R R R

- -

f ( √ )

L L

f =

where:
Wien Bridge oscillator i i ’ Oscillator
= =
√ ( )

Ring oscillator f= 1/(no. of inverters*inverter del)

Low Pass Filters

( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 165
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

High Pass Filters

( )

Band Pass Filters

( )

( )

>

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 166
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Sinusoidal Oscillators

∑ Amplifier A

Frequency
selective
network 𝛃

Fig. Basic structure of sinusoidal oscillator


( )
Gain with feedback ( ) ( ) ( )
 An Oscillator should have finite output for zero input signal at a particular frequency.
 So condition for feedback loop to provide sinusoidal oscillations of frequency is
L(j ) ( ) ( )
Here, L is Loop gain = β
 So at , the phase of the loop gain should be zero and magnitude of loop gain should be
unity. This is shown as Bakhausen Criterion

OP Amp RC Oscillators Circuits


I. Wien Bride Oscillator

C R

C R

β
 L g i β * + * +
 Magnitude of loop gain should be i y⟹

 Ph e f g i h d e ze ⟹

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 167
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

II. Phase Shift Oscillator

C C C

k
R R R

 It consist of three section (3rd order) RC ladder network in feedback.


 Amplifier is of –ve gain ( k)
 For phase shift of loop gain to be 0° (or 3600), RC network should have phase shift of
180° as A have 180° phase shift.
 Minimum three section of RC network (3rd order) is required to get 180° shift at a finite
frequency.

LC Tuned Oscillators

R R
L

L C

(a) Colpitts (b) Hartley

 For Colpitts oscillator,


Oscillation frequency
√ ( )

g ⁄ for oscillation to start

 For Hartley oscillator.

√(L L )

L
g > f ci i
L

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 168
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

Crystal Oscillator

 Series capacitance
 Parallel capacitance
 Series resonant frequency

 Parallel resonant frequency

√ ( )

Bistable Multivibrators
 Has two stable states.
 Circuit can remain in either state and it moves to other stable state only when
appropriately triggered.

(A) Inverting

( )

βL

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 169
Quick Refresher Guide Analog Circuits

βL

Transfer Characteristics
 From transfer characteristics, we see that for input voltage in , o/p can
either be L or L depending on state the circuit is already in.

(B) Non – Inverting

L ( )

L ( )

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 170
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Part -7: Electronics Device & Circuits


7. 1: Semiconductor Theory
Atomic Structute
 The emitted radiation by its wavelength λ in Angstroms , when electron transition from one
state to the other state is
,
A And this energy is emitted in the form of a photon of light.

Insulators, Semiconductors and Metals

 A very poor conductor of electricity is called an insulator; an excellent conductor is a metal;


and a substance whose conductivity lies between these extremes is semiconductor.

Insulator: For a diamond (Carbon) crystal the region containing no quantum states is several
electron volts high ( ≈6eV). The energy gap is so large that electrons cannot be easily excited
from the valence band to the conduction band by any external stimuli (Electrical, thermal or
optical).

Metal: This refers to a situation where the conduction and valence bands are overlapping. This is
the case of a metal where = 0. This situation makes a large number of electrons available for
electrical conduction and, therefore the resistance of such materials is low or the conductivity is
high.

Semiconductor: A substance for which the width of the forbidden energy region is relatively
small (~1eV) is called a semiconductor.

 The energy gap EG for silicon decreases with temperature at the rate of 3.60 × 10-4 eV / K.
Hence, for silicon, T T and at room temperature (300 K), EG
= 1.1 eV.
 Similarly for germanium, T – T and at room temperature, EG =
0.72 eV

Current Density: If N electrons are contained in a length L of conductor (fig) and if it takes an
electron a time T sec to travel a distance of L meter in the conductor, the total number of
electrons passing through any cross section of wire in unit time is N/T.

N electrons

A
L

Thus the total charge per second passing any point, which by definition is the current in
amperes, is I = Nq / T………… 1) Where q = 1.602 x 10-19 C

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 171
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

By definition, the current density, denoted by the symbol J, is the current per unit area of the
conducting medium, i.e., assuming a uniform current distribution J = I /A……… 2)

J n qv ρV

Where ρ nq is the charge density, in coulombs per cubic meter, and v is in meters per second.

Mobility and Conductivity

 The drift velocity v is in the direction opposite to that of the electric field, and its magnitude
is proportional to 𝛆. Thus
v electric field
where m2 / V - s) is called the mobility of the electrons.

 If the concentration of free electrons is n (electrons per cubic meter), the current density J
(amperes per square meter) is J nqv nq
where q = electron charge = 1.602 x 10 C and
-19

V nq
is the conductivity of the substance in (ohm meter)-1

 The parameter µ varies as T-m over a temperature range of 100 to 400 K. For silicon, m = 2.5
(2.7) for electrons (holes), and for germanium, m = 1.66 (2.33) for electrons (holes).

Electrons and Holes in an Intrinsic Semiconductor

 Germanium (Ge) and Silicon (Si) are the two most important semiconductors used in
electronic devices.

 The energy EG required to break such a covalent bond is about 0.72 eV for germanium and
1.1 eV for silicon at room temperature.

Conductivity of a Semiconductor

 The current density J is given by


J n n p p q

n = magnitude of free electron (negative) concentration, p = magnitude of hole (positive)


concentration, conductivity, electric field and q electron charge
Hence
n n p p q

The resistivity ρ is inversely proportional to the conductivity and is given by


ρ n n p p

 For a pure (called intrinsic) semiconductor


n p n where ni is the intrinsic concentration

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 172
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

 With increasing temperature, the density of hole – electron pair increases and
correspondingly, the conductivity increases.
n A T e

 The intrinsic concentration ni varies with temperature in accordance with the above
relationship.
Where A0 = material constant. T = temperature in degree Kelvin, EGO = energy gap at 0 K in
eV, K = Boltzmann constant in eV/ K

Carrier Concentration in an Intrinsic Semiconductor:

 The probability of occupation f(E) of an energy level E by electron is given by


f
exp KT

 The Fermi level can be defined as that level which has a 50% probability of occupation by an
electron at any temperature.

 As temperature increases conduction increase in intrinsic semiconductor.


KT eV meV

 The electron concentration n is proportional to f(E).

n∝e
( )
n ce

Nc = Conduction constant = 4.82 × 1015 (mn/m) 3/2. T3/2 per cm3

 Similarly hole concentration is

ve

The above equations (for n and p) apply to both intrinsic and extrinsic or impure
semiconductors.

For Intrinsic Semiconductor: Fermi level in intrinsic semiconductor is called Intrinsic Fermi level

( )
So n e n

p e n

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 173
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Also for intrinsic semiconductor,

n p n

So n n p

n e

Also n p

KT ln ( )

KT ln ( )

KT ln ( )

Here m is effective mass of hole m is effective mass of electron

 When an electron in a periodic potential is accelerated ‘relative’ to the lattice in an electric


field or magnetic field then the mass of that electron is called “effective mass”

ni = 2.5 × 1013 carries/ cm3 → Ge (at room temperature)

ni = 1.5 × 1010 carries/ cm3 → Si (at room temperature)

 Where ni is no. of carriers (or) no. of covalent bonds that are broken for the given
temperature.

Fermi Potential

N – type Semiconductor
KT n KT
ln ( ) ln ( )
q n q n

Where q

P – type semiconductor
KT p KT
ln ( ) ln ( )
q n q n
Where

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 174
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

The Fermi Level in an Intrinsic Semiconductor

 Hence the Fermi level lies in the center of the forbidden energy band.

The Intrinsic Concentration

 For intrinsic material n = p = ni, we have the important relationship (called the mass –
action law) np n

 Note that, regardless of the individual magnitudes of n and p, the product is always constant
at a fixed temperature.

Charge Densities in a Semiconductor

np =

gives the relationship between the electron n and the hole p concentrations.

 Since the semiconductor is electrically neutral, the magnitude of the positive charge density
must equal to that of the negative concentration, or

--- (1)
ND + p =NA +n

 Consider an n – type material having NA = 0. Since the number of electrons is much greater
than the number of holes in an n – type semiconductor (n >> p) then equation (1) reduces
to

n≃ D or nn ≃ D

 In a n- type material the free electron concentration nn is approximately equal to the density
of donor atoms.

 The concentration pn of holes in the n – type semiconductor is obtained from

nn pn = n

Thus , pn n

Similarly, for a p - type semiconductor


p n p ≃ n n

 According to the law of mass action, the product of the number of electrons in the
conduction band and the number of holes in the valence band must be constant.

For material doped with both acceptor and donor impurity and if or ,
then

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 175
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

np n and n p

p= √( ) n

And n = √( ) n

Fermi level in a semiconductor having impurities


Variation n- type P – type conduction
Doping increases EF goes up EF goes down Increases
Temperature Increases EF goes down EF goes up Decreases

Temperature Effect on Extrinsic Semiconductor


 At very low temperature range the conductivity is an exponential function of temperature.
The conductivity increases as the temperature increases upto certain level that depends on
doping concentration. Increasing temperature, the density of carriers will increases in
decreasing mean free path of the conduction electrons or holes. So, the conduction decreases
with increasing temperature.

At extraordinary high temperatures extrinsic will behave as intrinsic semiconductor.

Drift and diffusion Currents

 The diffusion current density for electrons is Jn = q Dn

 Dn = Diffusion constant of the electrons in m2/sec.

 Similarly, diffusion current density for holes is

Jp =- q Dp Dp = diffusion constant of the holes in m2/sec.

 The hole current in any point x may be written as the sum of two contributions, one from the
field and one from the diffusion process:

Jp p p q𝛆 –q dp

 Similarly, the total electron current density

Jn = n n q𝛆 +q dn

 The diffusion constant is proportional to the mobility

= =VT

Where VT = kT/q = T/11,600 where = volt equivalent of Temperature

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 176
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

The continuity equation

 The diffusion length for holes is given by Lp =√

 Similarly for electrons Ln =√ .

The Hall Effect

 If a specimen (metal or semiconductor) carrying a current I is placed in a transverse


magnetic field B. an electric field 𝛆 is induced in the direction perpendicular to both I and B.
This phenomenon, known as the “Hall ffect”
 The Hall voltage V d vd Jd ρ I ρW
Where d = distance between two surfaces;
w= width of the specimen; J = current density; v= drift velocity; ρ = charge density.
nq or pq
q= charge of electron
 The Hall coefficient RH is defined by ρ VHw I

ρ q Aq

 If conduction is due to primary charges of one sign, the conductivity is related to the
mobility by ρ
 If the conductivity is measured together with the Hall coefficient RH, the mobility can be
determined from H
 The Hall coefficient RH of an intrinsic semiconductor is negative under all conditions.
 In an extrinsic semiconductor, the Hall coefficient RH increases with increase of temperature.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 177
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

7.2: P - N Junction Theory and Characteristics


Potential Variation within a Graded Semiconductor

 In a graded (non – uniform) semiconductor, doping is non – uniform.

, ,
1 2
x
0

x  distance
v  built in potential
p  hole concentration
n  electron concentration

 v v ln V ln

 e

 n n e

 n p n p

Step – Graded Junction Semiconductor


p type n type

x x

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 178
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

The type of doping where doping density changes abruptly from p-type to n-type is called Step
grading.

v v v v V ln V ln V ln

The P-N Junction as a Diode

 Diode permits the easy flow of current in one direction but restrains the flow in the opposite
direction.

Forward Bias

(i) More majority carriers will be allowed to flow across the junction.
(ii) The junction width decreases.

The current flow is principally due to majority charge carriers and is large (mA).

Reverse Bias

 The junction width will increase.


 Reverse bias current will be due to the minority carriers only

Band Structure of an Open Circuited P-N Junction

This energy E0 represents the potential energy of the electrons at junction.

p - region Space charge n- region


region

Conduction band

ECP

½ EG E0 Conduction band
ECN
EF E1
½ EG E0
EF ½ EG
E2
EVP

Valence band ½ EG
Eo
EVN

Valence band

Fig: Band diagram for a p-n junction under open-circuit conditions.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 179
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

E0 = kT ln = kT ln = kT ln

Forward Currents

I = I0(eV/𝛈VT -1) …………

≃2 for silicon, ≃ for germanium

 I0 depends on material and it is fixed for a given device. But varies with temperature
| |
I02 = I01x

 Where I01(I02) is the reverse saturation current at a temperature T1(T2).


 I0 doubles for every 10oC rise in temperature.

Volt-Ampere Characteristic
(a) When the voltage V is positive and several times VT, the unity in the paranthesis of equation
(1) may be neglected. i.e., 𝛈 ,
𝛈
∴ I=I0

Accordingly except for a small range in the neighborhood of the origin, the current increases
exponentially with voltage.

(b) When the diode is reverse-biased and |V| is several times VT,I≈-I0. The “reverse current” is
therefore constant, independent of the applied reverse bias. Consequently, I0 is referred to
as the “reverse saturation current”

Transition or Space Charge (or Depletion Region) Capacitance (Ct)

The parallel layers of oppositely charged immobile ions on the two sides of the junction form the
transition capacitance, CT, which is given by CT A W, where 0 r) is the permittivity of
the material, A is the cross-sectional area of the junction and W is the width of the depletion
layer over which the ions are uncovered.

The net charge must be zero across the depletion region will satisfy the condition

NAWP=NDWn

Where NA=acceptor concentration; ND=donor concentration; Wp=width of the depletion region


in p-side; Wn=width of the depletion region in n-side;

if NA<<ND, then Wp>>Wn.


𝛆

The total depletion width, W is given by

𝛆
W=[ * +]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 180
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Where, VB= (V0-V), V is the applied voltage and V0 is the barrier potential, or the contact
potential.

 When forward bias +V is applied, the effective barrier potential, VB= [V0-(+V)], is lowered
and hence the width of the depletion region W decreases and CT increases. Under reverse bias
condition, the majority carriers move away from the junction, thereby uncovering more
immobile charges. Now the effective barrier potential, VB= [V0-(-V)], is increased and hence,
W increase with reverse voltage and CT decreases correspondingly.

Diffusion (or Storage) Capacitance (Cd)

The capacitance that exists in a forward biased junction is called a diffusion or storage
capacitance (CD), whose value is usually much larger than CT, which exists in a reverse-biased
junction. This is also represented as, CD I VT), where is the mean life time for holes and
electrons.

Diode Applications

The same PN junction with different doping concentration finds special applications as follows:

(i) Detectors (apd, pin photo diode) in optical communication circuits


(ii) Zener diodes in voltage regulators
(iii) Varactor diodes in tuning sections of radio and tv receivers
(iv) Light emitting diodes in digital displays
(v) Laser diodes in optical communications
(vi) Tunnel diodes as a relaxation oscillator at microwave frequencies.

Breakdown Diodes

The upper limit on diode current is determined by the power dissipation rating of the diode. The
thermally generated electrons and holes acquire sufficient energy from the applied potential to
produce new carriers by removing valence electrons from their bonds. These new carriers, in
turn, produce additional carriers again through the process of disrupting bonds. This cumulative
process is referred to as "avalanche multiplication". It results in the flow of large reverse
currents, and the diode finds itself in the region of "avalanche breakdown". This avalanche effect
is now known to play with breakdown voltages below or about 6V.

Even if the initially available carriers do not acquire sufficient energy to disrupt bonds, it is
possible to initiate breakdown through a direct rupture of the bonds because of the existing of
the strong electric field. Under these circumstances the break down is referred to as the "zener
breakdown". This zener effect is now known to play with breakdown voltages below or about
6V.

Tunnel Diode

Tunneling phenomenon: The width of the junction barrier varies inversely as the square root of
impurity concentration (1 in ) and therefore is reduced from 5 microns to less than
100A°( cm).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 181
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

The barrier is very thin to allow the carriers to tunnel through it. The tunnel diode exhibits a
negative resistance characteristic between the peak current Ip and the minimum value Iv, called
the valley current. The tunnel diode useful in pulse and digital circuitry.

IP
Forward
current

Symbol for tunnel diode

RS LS
IV
Reverse voltage VP Vv VF V Rn
Forward voltage
Reverse
current

Fig. Small signal model of tunnel diode in the


Fig. The volt-ampere characteristics of tunnel
negative resistance region
diode

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 182
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

7.3: Transistor Theory (BJT, FET)


Transistor Circuit configurations
Basically, there are three types of circuit connections (called configurations) for operating a
transistor.
1. Common-base (CB), 2. Common-emitter (CE), 3. Common-collector (CC).

CB Configuration
In this configuration, emitter current IE is the input current and collector IC is the output current.
The input signal is applied between the emitter and base whereas output is taken out from the
collector and base as shown in below figure.
The ratio of the collector current to the emitter current is called dc alpha αbc or just α of a
transistor
αbc α IC/IE
It is also called forward current transfer ratio (hFB). In hFB, subscript F stands for forward and B
for common-base.

C E

E C B B

⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄
⁄ C
E
B

(a) (b) (c)

The α of a transistor is a measure of the quality of a transistor higher the value of α, better the
transistor in the sense that collector current more closely equals the emitter current.
Its value ranges from 0.95 to 0.999. Obviously, it applies only to CB configuration of a transistor.
IC α IE Now, IB= =IE – αIE=(1-α IE I I I
Incidentally, there is also an a c α for a transistor It refers to the ratio of change in collector
current to the change in emitter current.
αac ∆IC ∆IE
It is also, known as short-circuit gain of a transistor and is written as hfb.
It may be noted that uppercase subscript ‘ ’ indicates dc value whereas lowercase subscript ‘fb’
indicates ac value or all practical purposes, αdc αac α

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 183
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

CE Configuration
Here, input signal is applied between the base and emitter and output signal is taken out from
the collector and emitter circuit. As seen from above figure. (b)IB is the input current and IC is the
output current.
The ratio of the d.c. collector current to d c base current is called dc beta βdc or just β of the
transistor.
∴ β IC/IB or IC β IB
It is also called common-emitter d.c. forward transfer ratio and is written as hFE. It is possible for
β to have as high a value as
While analyzing ac operation of a transistor, we use a c β which is given by
βac ∆IC ∆IB.
It is also written as hfe.
elation etween α and β
β IC/IB and α IC/IE ∴ β α IE/IB
α β β ∴β α -α
(1-α β
CC Configuration
In this case, input signal is applied between base and collector and output signal is taken out
from emitter-collector circuit. Conventionally speaking, here IB is the input current and IE is the
output current as shown in above figure (c). The current gain of the circuit is
I I I β β
β
I I I α β β

Relationship Between Transistor Currents


While deriving various equations, following definitions should be kept in mind.
α IC/IE), β (IC/IB), α and β
(i) IC =βIB αIE= IE
(ii) IB=IC/β= α IE
(iii) IE=IC/ α= βI β I
(iv) The three transistor d.c. currents always bear the following relation
IE : IB : IC : : 1: (1-α : α
Incidentally, it may be noted that for ac currents, small letters ie, ib and ic are used.
CB Configuration
The leakage current ICBO where the subscripts C O stand for ‘Collector to ase with emitter
Open ’ Very often, it is simply written as ICO. It should be noted that
(i) ICBO is exactly like the reverse saturation current IS or I0 of a reverse-biased diode.
(ii) ICBO is extremely temperature-dependent because it is made up of thermally-generated
minority carriers.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 184
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

ICBO doubles for every 10oC rise in temperature for Ge and 6oC for Si.
Total collector current is actually the sum of two components:
(i) Current produced by normal transistor action i.e. component controlled by emitter
current. Its value is ∝ I and is due to majority carriers.
(ii) temperature-dependent leakage current ICO due to minority carriers.
∴ IC α IE + ICO
Since ICO << IC hence α ≅ IC/IE
∴ IC β I B β ICO
Operating Regions
A BJT has two junctions i.e. base-emitter and base-collector junctions either of which could be
forward-biased or reverse-biased. With two junctions, there are four possible combinations of
bias condition.
(i) both junctions reverse-biased.
(ii) both junctions forward-biased.
(iii) BE (Base-Emitter) junction forward-biased, BC (Base-Collector) junction reverse-biased.
(iv)BE junction reverse-biased, BC junction forward-biased.
Since condition (iv) is generally not used, we will tabulate the remaining three conditions below.
Transistor Operation Regions
BE Junction BC Junction Region
RB* RB Cut-Off
FB** FB Saturation
FB RB Active
*Reverse-biased, **forward-biased
(a) Cut-off
This condition corresponds to reverse-bias for both base-emitter and base-collector
junctions. In fact, both diodes act like open circuits under theses conditions, which is true for
an ideal transistor. In cut-off, VCE=VCC
(b) Saturation
This condition corresponds to forward-bias for both base-emitter and base-collector
junctions. The transistor becomes saturated i.e. there is perfect short-circuit for both base-
emitter and base-collector diodes. In this case, VCE=0.
(c) Active Region
This condition corresponds to forward-bias for base-emitter junction and reverse bias for
base-collector junction. In this case, VCE > 0.

Reach-through
The second mechanism by which a transistor’s usefulness may be terminated as the collector
voltage is increased is called punch-through, or reach-through, and results from the increased
width of the collector-junction transition region with increased collector-junction voltage (the
Early effect).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 185
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

As the voltage applied across the collector junction increases, the transition region penetrates
deeper into the collector and base. Because neutrality of charge must be maintained, the number
of uncovered charges on each side remains equal. Since the doping in the base is ordinarily
substantially smaller than that of the collector, the penetration of the transition region into the
base is much larger than into the collector. This process is known as Early Effect, or Base-width
Modulation.

Field Effect Transistors


The acronym 'FET' stands for field effect transistor. It is a three-terminal unipolar solid-state
device in which current is controlled by an electric field as is done in vacuum tubes.
Broadly speaking, there are two types of FETs
a. Junction field effect transistor (JFET)
b. metal-oxide semiconductor FET (MOSFET)
It is also called insulated-gate FET (IGFET). It may be further subdivided into

(i) depletion-enhancement MOSFET i.e. DE-MOSFET


(ii) enhancement-only MOSFET i.e. E-only MOSFET
Both of these can be either P-channel or N-channel devices.

The FET family tree is shown below


FET

Junction FET (JFET) Metal-Oxide Semiconductor FET


(MOSFET/IGFET)

DE-MOSFET E-only MOSFET

N-Channel P-Channel N-Channel P-Channel N-Channel P-Channel


D D D D D +VD D -VDD
+VD -VDD +VD -VDD
D G
G D G G D G G

S S S S S S

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 186
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Junction FET (JFET)

(a) Basic Construction

Depletion region
IG

p+ type gate
Drain
D
IS w
2b(x)
2a
S
Source n-type W(x) p+ type gate
x ID
VGG channel
G
Gate
+

VDD

Fig. shows, the basic structure of a n-channel field-effect transistor. The normal polarities of
the drain-to-source and gate-to-source supply voltages are shown. In a p-channel FET the
voltages would be reversed.
1. Source: It is the terminal through which majority carriers enter the bar. Since carriers
come from it, it is called the source.
2. Drain: It is the terminal through which majority carriers leave the bar i.e. they are
drained out from this terminal. The drain-to-source voltage VDS drives the drain current
ID.
3. Gate: These are two internally-connected heavily-doped impurity regions which form
two P-N junctions. The gate-source voltage VGS reverse-biases the gates.
4. Channel: It is the space between two gates through which majority carriers pass from
source-to- drain when VDS is applied.
Schematic symbols for N-channel and P-channel JFET are shown in the above Figures. It
must be kept in mind that gate arrow always points to N-type material (channel).
(b) Theory of Operation
While discussing the theory of operation of a JFET, it should be kept in mind that
1. Gates are always reversed-biased. Hence, gate current IG is practically zero.
2. The sourced terminal is always connected to that end of the drain supply which provides
the necessary charge carriers.
In a N-channel JFET, source terminal S is connected to the negative end of the drain voltage
supply (for obtaining electrons).In a P-channel JFET, S is connected to the positive end of
the drain voltage supply for getting holes which flow through the channel.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 187
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Drain

ID +

+
Gate G VDD
-
+ VDS
- IG
VGG
+ VGS IS

S -
-

Figure shows Circuit symbol for a n-channel FET. (For a p-channel FET the arrow at the gate
junction points in the opposite direction.) For a n-channel FET, ID and VDS are positive and
VGS is negative. For a p-channel FET, ID and VDS are negative and VGS is positive.
(i) Keeping VGS at a fixed value (either zero or negative), as VDS is increased, ID initially
increases till channel pinch-off when it becomes almost constant and finally increases
excessively when JFET breaks down under high value of VDS . As VGS is kept fixed at
progressively higher negative values, the values of VP as well as breakdown voltage
decrease.
(ii) Keeping VDS at a fixed value, as VGS is made more and more negative, ID decreases till it is
reduced to zero for a certain value of VGS called VGS(off).
Since gate voltage controls the drain current, JFET is called a voltage-controlled device.
A P-channel JFET operates exactly in the same manner as an N-channel JFET except that
current carriers are holes and polarities of both VDD and VGS are reversed.
Since only one type of majority carrier (either electrons or holes) is used in JFETs, they
are called unipolar devices unlike bipolar junction transistors (BJTs) which use both
electrons and holes as carriers.

Static Characteristics of a JFET


We will consider the following two characteristics:
(i) Drain characteristics
It gives relation between ID and VDS for different values of VGS (which is called running
variable).

(ii) Transfer characteristics


It gives relation between ID and VGS for different values of VDS.
JFET Drain Characteristics with VGS = 0
Ohmic Pinch off
region (Saturation)
region
Breakdown
IDSS B C region
VGS=0

ID A

0 VA
VP VDS VDS

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 188
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Such a characteristic is shown in Fig. It can be sub-divided into following four regions:

1. Ohmic Region OA
This part of the characteristic is linear indicating that for low-values of VDS, current varies
directly with voltage following Ohm's Law. It means that JFET behaves like an ordinary
resistor till point A (called knee) is reached.

2. Curve AB
In this region, ID increases at reverse square-law rate upto point B which is called pinch-off
point. The drain-to-source voltage VDS corresponding to point B is called pinch-off-voltage Vp.
But it is essential to remember that pinch-off does not mean current-off.

3. Pinch – off Region BC


It is also known as saturation region or amplified region. Here, JFET operates as constant –
current device because ID is relatively independent of VDS.It is due to the fact that as VDS
increases, channel resistance also increases proportionally thereby keeping ID practically
constant at IDSS.

Drain current in this region is given by Shockley’s equation

ID = IDSS * + = IDSS * +

It is the normal operating region of the JFET when used as an amplifier.

4. Breakdown Region
If VDS is increased beyond its value corresponding to point C (called avalanche breakdown
voltage), JFET enters the breakdown region where ID increases to an excessive value.

This happens because the reverse-biased gate-channel P-N junction undergoes avalanche
break down when small change in VDS produce very large changes in ID.

Transfer Characteristic

It is a plot of ID versus VGS for a constant value of VDS and as shown in fig. It is similar to the
transconductance characteristics of vacuum tube or a transistor.

It is seen that when VGS = 0, ID = IDSS and when ID = 0, VGS = VP

The transfer characteristics approximately follows the equation


IDSS
VDS
ID
Constant

- 4V 0
-2V
VGS

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 189
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

ID = IDSS * + = IDSS [ ]

The above equation can be written as

VGS = =[ √ ]

(i) Transconductance, gm
It is simply the slope of transfer characteristics.
change in I ∆I
r at V constant or rd at V constant
change in V ∆V
Its unit is Siemens (S) earlier called mho. It is also called forward transconductance (gfs) or
forward transadmittance yfs.
The transconductance measured at IDSS is written as gmo.

Mathematical Expression for gm

The Shockely equation is ID = I [ ]

g = [ ]

When VGS = 0, gm=gm0 ∴ gmo =

From the above equations, we have gm=gmo [ ]=gmo

(ii) Amplification actor ,



It is given by µ = at ID constant or at ID = constant

It can be proved from above that

gm×rd

(iii)DC Drain Resistance, RDS


It is also called the static or ohmic resistance of the channel. It is given by

Depletion-enhancement MOSFET or DE-MOSFET

(i) Depletion Mode of N-channel DE-MOSFET


When VGS = 0, electrons can flow freely from source to drain through the conducting channel
which exists between them. When gate is given negative voltage, it depletes the N-channel of
its electrons by including positive charge in it.
Greater the negative voltage on the gate, greater is the reduction in the number of electrons
in the channel and, consequently, lesser its conductivity. In fact, too much negative gate
voltage called V V can-off the channel.
For obvious reasons, negative-gate operation of a DE-MOSFET is called its depletion mode
operation.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 190
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

(ii) Enhancement Mode of N-channel DE-MOSFET


The circuit connections are shown in above Figure. Again drain current flows from source to
drain even with zero gate bias. When positive voltage is applied to the gate, the input gate
capacitor is able to create free electrons in the channel, which increases Id.
As positive gate voltage is increased, the number of induced electrons is increased, so
conductivity of the source-to-drain channel is increased and, consequently, increasing
amount of current flows between the terminals. That is why, positive gate operation of a DE-
MOSFET is known as its enhancement mode operation. Since gate current in both modes is
negligibly small, input resistance of a MOSFET is incredibly high varying from 1010Ω to
1014Ω In fact, MOS T input current is the leakage current of the capacitor unlike the input
current for JFET which is the leakage current of a reverse-biased P-N junction

ID, mA
Enhancement ID, mA VGS = +3V
Depletion
ID(on) 6 6 2
1 Enhancement
5 0
4 4 -1
3 -2
2 -3 Depletion
2
1

-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 VGS, V 0 5 1 1 VDS, V
0
(b) 5
VGS(OFF) (a)

Fig. (a) The transfer curve (for VDS = 10 V) & (b) The drain characteristics for a n-channel
MOSFET which may be used in either the enhancement or the depletion mode.

MOSFET Current & threshold voltage

The MOS transistor is a symmetric device. This means that the drain and source terminals are
interchangeable. For a conducting nMOS transistor, VDS > 0V; for the pMOS transistor, VDS < 0V
(or VSD > 0V).

Basic MOS Device Equations

Drain

Gate
Bulk(or substrate for nMOS device in n – well
technology)
Source

The nMOS device is a four terminal device: Gate, Drain, Source, and Bulk.

Bulk (substrate) terminal is normally ignored at schematic level, usually tied to ground for the
nMOS case. In analog applications, however, the bulk terminal may not be ignored.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 191
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Gate controls channel formation for conduction between Drain and Source. Drain is at higher
potential than source. Source usually tied to GND to act as pull - down (nMOS).

Three regions of operations – first – order (ideal) equations:

Cutoff region

ID = 0A VGS VTn (nMOS threshold voltage)

Linear region

ID β , - 0 < VDS < VGS - VTn

Note: ID is linear with respect to only when is small.

Saturation region

ID = V V 2 0 < VGS -VTn< VDS

Where β Co ×

MOSFET Threshold Voltage

VT = VT-MOS +VFB (VT-MOS is positive for nMOS, negative for pMOS)

VT-MOS ideal threshold voltage for a MOS capacitor the capacitor formed between the gate and
substrate)

VFB – Flatband Voltage

VT-MOS = 2b + ote: “Qb” sometimes referred to as “Qbo”

b = In * + ⟸ bulk Fermi potential

Cox = oxide capacitance, inversely proportional to oxide thickness [Cox = ]

Qb = √ q ⇐ bulk charge term (total charge stored in depletion layer), p-substrate in


this case

Bulk potential – potential difference between Fermi level in intrinsic semiconductor and Fermi
level in doped semiconductor

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 192
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

7.4: Basics of OPTO Electronics

Fundamentals Of Light
The energy contained in a photon depends on the frequency of the light and is given by the
relation E= hf where h is lank’s constant -34 joule-second). In this equation , energy

E is in joules and frequency f is in hertz (Hz).

The wavelength of light determines its colour in the visible range and whether it is ultraviolet or
infrared outside the visible range.

Now, E = hf = hc λ or λ hc meters

For example, the wavelength of light emitted by silicon p-n junction is

λ g = 1.242/1.1 m

Photodiodes
Photodiode is a special type of photo-detector. The general principle of all semiconductor-based
photo detectors is the electron-excitation from the valence band to the conduction band by
photons.

Suppose an optical photon of frequency V is incident on a semiconductor, such that its energy is
greater than the band gap of the semiconductor ( i.e., hv >Eg).

Applications
1. Detection, both visible and invisible
2. Demodulation
3. Switching
4. Logic circuit that require stability and high speed
5. Character recognition
6. Optical communication equipment
7. Encoders etc

PIN Photo detector


When a light intensity of wavelength λ is incident on the photo diode , if energy λ > EG of PIN
diode then a output current ‘Ip’ in response to the incident light is produced.

o of electron hole pairs generated


Quantum efficiency of I diode is given by
o of photons incidented

Responsivity R = Ip/P0 q hf A/watt

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 193
Quick Refresher Guide EDC

Maximum wavelength λmax m λmax(A0) =

f = frequency of incident photon

P0 = incident optical power

Ip = photocurrent generated in PIN diode

Light Emitting Diode (LED)


These are forward-biased p-n junctions which emit spontaneous radiation. There are two
distinct energy bands in a semiconductor, the conduction (higher energy) and the valence
(lower energy) bands. There may also be energy bands due to donor impurities (ED) near the
conduction band or acceptor impurities (EA) near the valence band. When electron falls from
the higher to lower energy level containing holes, the energy in the form of light radiation is
released. Generally, radiations transitions occur (sometimes non-radioactive transition may also
occur).The energy of radiation emitted by LED is equal to or less than the band gap of the
semiconductor used.
The semiconductor used in LED is chosen according to the required wavelength of emitted
radiation. Visible LEDs are available for red, green and orange. The visible wavelength is from
m to m nergy eV to eV Therefore, the least band gap of the semiconductor
for use in the visible region is 1.8ev. Phosphorous doped (GaAs P) and GaP are the preferred
materials. Obviously, Si (Eg ~ 1.1eV) or Ge(Eg ~ 0.7eV) are not suitable, since Eg is less than the
minimum required Eg of ~ 1.8 eV.
GaAs ( with Eg ~1.5 eV) alone or in conjunction with aluminum doped GaAs (AlGaAs) are
commonly used for infrared LEDs.
The color of the emitted light depends on the type of material used is given below:
1. GaAs infrared radiation invisible
2. Ga red or green light
3. GaAsP – red or yellow (amber) light.
LEDs emit no light when reverse-biased. In fact, operating LEDs in reverse direction will quickly
destroy them.
Laser Diode
The word LASER is an acronym and stands for “light amplification by stimulated emission and
radiation”, which sums up the operation of an important optical and electronic device. The laser
is a source of highly directional, monochromatic, and coherent light.
Unique characteristics of Laser Light
The beam of laser light produced by the diode has the following unique characteristics
1. It is coherent i.e. there is no path difference between the waves comprising the beam.
2. It is monochromatic i.e. it consists of one wavelength and hence one color only
3. It is collimated i.e. emitted light waves travels parallel to each other.
Laser diodes have a threshold level of current above which the laser action occurs but below
which the laser diode behave like a LED emitting coherent light incidentally, a filter or lens is
necessary to view the laser beam.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 194
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

Part – 8: Communication Systems


8.1: Basics of Communication Signals

Typical frequency range for audio and video signals are given below:

Voice ----------- 300 – 3.5KHz

Audio ----------- 20Hz – 20KHz

Video ----------- 0 – 4.5 MHz

Modulation:

Modulation is defined as “the process in which some characteristic parameter of a high


frequency carrier is varied linearly with the amplitude of the message signal”.

Modulator converts (1) low frequency signal to a high frequency signal, (2) a wide band signal
into narrowband signal, (3) a baseband signal into band pass signal

Need for Modulation:

(1) To reduce the antenna height.


(2) For multiplexing of signals.
(3) To reduce noise and interference.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 195
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.2: Amplitude Modulation (AM)


In A.M. the amplitude of the carrier is varied linearly with the amplitude of message signal.

S(t)
Ac[1+μ]
m(t) 0< μ 1
Ac

Ac[1-μ]

0
0 -Ac[1-μ]
-Ac

-Ac[1+μ]

S(t)= cos(2πf t)+ m(t) cos(2πf t) = [1+ m(t)]cos2πf t,

where =Amplitude Sensitivity

S(f)= [δ(f-f )+δ(f+f ) ] + [M(f-f )+M(f+f )]


S(f)
M(f) ( )
/2
K USB
LSB

-fc-w -fc f -fc+w fc-w fc fc+w


f
-W 0 W
2w

Single Tone Modulation of A.M


S(t)= [1+μ cos (2πf t)]cos (2πf t), where = μ= modulation index

The maximum and minimum value of the positive envelope is [1+μ] and [1-μ] respectively.

S(t) = cos 2πf t + cos 2π(f +f ) t + cos 2π(f -f ) t

Carrier USB LSB

B.W =2f =2×Highest frequency of message signal

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 196
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

Power Calculations of AM

Power of carrier =* + =

Power of USB = Power of LSB =

Total Power = +

ower in side ands μ 2 μ


Modulation Efficiency = = =
Total ower μ 2+μ
(1 + )
2

Multi –Tone Modulation: If the message contains ‘n’ frequencies, μ = μ + μ + +μ

ower in side ands μ 2 μ


= = =
Total ower (1 + μ 2) 2 + μ

For an input of Ac[1+Kam(t)]cos2πfct, the output of envelop detector is Ac+AcKam(t). The


envelope of the input must be positive to get the exact message signal.

An overmodulated signal can’t e demodulated y a square law demodulator and envelope


detector.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 197
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.3: DSBSC and SSB Modulation

To increase the modulation efficiency, the carrier is suppressed and only the sidebands are
transmitted.

S(t)=Acm(t) cos 2πfct [Time domain equation of DSB, carrier is suppressed]

S(f)= [M(f f ) + M(f + f )] [Frequency domain equation]

M(f)
S(f
K ) 2

f
-W 0 W f
-fc +fc fc+ 0 fc-W
W
Power required to transmit a DSB wave is very less compared to AM, but the bandwidth is same
as AM.

Single-Tone Modulation of DSBSC

S(t) = [cos 2π(fc-fm) t + cos 2π(fc+fm)t]

PLSB=PUSB= Pt= =1

% Power Saving compare to AM = 100 = = =1


( )

Demodulation of DSB signals

Coherent Detection

If there is phase difference of in oscillator carrier in receiver and transmitter, then o/p of
coherent detector is,

()
(t) = cos

()
=0 (t) =

= 0 v (t) = 0 (Quadrature Null effect)

Synchronization circuits are necessary are to overcome the Quadrature null effect. So the
complexity of the receiver is increased.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 198
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

Single Sideband (SSB) Modulation

In order to reduce the bandwidth and power required to transmit the signal only one sideband is
transmitted (either USB or LSB).

S(f) SSB-USB SSB-LSB

USB USB LSB LSB


-fc-w -fc 0 fc fc+w f -fc -fc-w 0 fc-w fc f

S(t) = cos 2π (f + f )t (If USB is transmitted)

S(t) = cos 2π (f f )t (If LSB is transmitted)

The generalized equation is

S(t) = [m(t) cos 2πf t m


̂ (t) sin 2πf t] -ve sign means USB, +ve sign means LSB

Total ower required to transmit =

( ⁄ ) ( )
Power saving = = = ( )
( )

Demodulation of SSB Signals: Coherent Detection

Consider the locally generated signal as Ac cos(2πf t + ), then o/p of detector is,

V2(t) = [m(t). cos ̂ (t). sin ]


m

= 0 , V2(t) = m
̂ (t)

= 0 , V2(t) = m
̂ (t)

[ So no Quadrature null effect in the case of SSB, which is a major advantage over DSB].

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 199
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.4: Vestigial Sideband (VSB) Modulation


This is mainly used for the transmission of video signal. Power required to transmit a VSB signal
is same as SSB (ideal) but BW is more.

B.W = W + fv

SSB

VSB

Generation of VSB signal:

m(t) DSBSC
Product BPF VSB Signal
Modulator v(t) H(f) s(t)

Ac cos 2πfct

S(f + f ) = [M(f + 2f ) + M(f)] (f + f )

To get the exact message signal at receiver H(f-fc) + H(f + fc) should be a constant (K).

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 200
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.5: Angle Modulation


Angle Modulation is defined as the process in which the angle of the carrier (either frequency or
phase) is varied linearly according to the message signal and is called respectively FM and PM.
Phase Modulation: Changing the phase according to the message signal is called Phase
Modulation.
S(t) = cos[2πf t + m(t)]
(t) = m(t) , =Phase sensitivity of the modulator (radians/volt)
()
Instantaneous Frequency f = (t) = 2π ∫ f (t) dt

For single-Tone modulation:


(t) = cos 2πf t = = Maximum hase Deviation

f = sin 2πf t f = = Maximum Frequency Deviation

Frequency Modulation: Changing the frequency of the carrier according to the message signal is
called Frequency Modulation.
S(t) = AC cos [2πfc t +2π f ∫m(t)dt ]
Instantaneous frequency f (t) = f + m(t) where =Frequency sensitivity (hertz/Volt)

hase of FM wave (t) = 2πf t + 2π ∫ m(t) dt

For Single-Tone Modulation: f (t) = f + cos 2πf t


f, =f +
f, =f
f= =Frequency deviation
Peak-to-peak frequency variation or total variation of carrier frequency = 2 f
S(t) = [cos(2πf t + sin 2πf t)]

Modulation index of FM = = =

1, Narrow band FM
1, Wide band FM
Narrow Band FM: S(t) = cos(2πf t + sin 2πf t)
= [cos 2πf t. cos( sin 2πf t) sin 2πf t . sin( sin 2πf t)]
cos 2πf t sin 2πf t sin(2πf t) , for 1

cos 2πf t [cos 2π(f f )t cos 2π(f + f )t]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 201
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

S(f)
Ac/2

Ac 4 Spectrum of NBFM
fc-fm
fm fc+fm f

-Ac 4

The spectrum of AM and FM are identical except that the spectral component at f f is
180o out of phase.
= (1 + 2)
Wideband FM: S(t) = cos[2πf t + sin 2πf t]
Bessel function of order ‘n’ is: ( ) = ( )∫e ( )
d

Properties: 1) ( ) = ( 1) ( )
2) ∑ ( )=1
WBFM equation: S(t) = ∑ ( ) cos[2π(f + nf )t] n = 0, 1, 2,
S(t) = ( ) cos 2πf t + ( ) cos 2π(f + f )t + ( ) cos 2π(f f )+ ( ) cos 2π(f + 2f ) t
+ ( ) cos 2π(f 2f ) t +

S(t) = ( ) cos 2πf t + ( )[cos 2π(f + f )t cos 2π(f f ) t]


+ ( )[cos 2π(f + 2f ) t + cos 2π(f 2f ) t]

S(f) ( )
( )

( ) ( )

fc-fm
0 fc-2fm fc fc+fm fc+2fm f
( )

Fig. Spectrum of WBFM

Characteristics of a WBFM Signal

(1) WBFM spectrum consists of carrier and infinite number of sidebands, each separated by f
(2) The amplitudes of the spectral components depend on the Bessel function coefficients ( )
which decease as n increases. So the amplitudes of the spectral components also decrease
on both sides of the carrier.
(3) In WBFM spectrum amplitude of carrier component depends on ( ) and hence on
modulation index .

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 202
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

J0( )

2.4 8.6

5.5 11.8

The Bessel function coefficient ( ) = 0, when = 2.4, . , . , 11. ,

For these values of , the amplitude of the carrier component in the spectrum is zero and the
modulation efficiency is 1.

( ) ( ) ( )
= , = , =
order sideband = ( )
order sideband = ( )
order sideband = ( )

Total Power = ( )+ ( )+ ( )+ ( )+

= ∑ ( )= = Unmodulated carrier power

The total power is independent of modulation index. AM takes more power compared to FM for
the same message and carrier.

ractical B.W of WBFM using Carson’s Rule: Carson has proved that the number of sidebands
having significant amplitudes containing % of the total power is +1. So Bandwidth of FM is,

B. W = 2( + 1)f = 2* + 1+ f = 2 f + 2f

Generation of WBFM signal

1) Direct Method
2) Indirect Method (or) Armstrong Method

Direct Method: A voltage controlled oscillator is used to generate FM signal.


Indirect Method: In this method, NBFM signal is converted into WBFM signal.

m(t) NBFM NBFM Frequency WBFM


Modulator S1(t) multiplier S(t)

Ac cos2πfct

BFM S(t) = cos[2πf t + sin 2πf t]

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 203
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

o/p of frequency multiplier, WBFM S(t) = cos[n2πf t + n sin 2πf t]

= cos[2πf t + sin 2πf t] where f = nf =n

FM can be generated using Phase Modulator by prior integration of m(t)

m(t) Ac cos [2πfc t +2π f ∫ m ( t) dt]


PM

modulator FM wave
INT

PM can be generated using FM signal by prior differentiating message signal m(t).

dm(t)
m(t) dt FM Ac cos [2πfc t +Kp m ( t) ]
Differentiator
Modulator
PM wave

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 204
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.6: Superhetrodyne Receivers

Image Frequency: fsi=fS+2IF

Image section can be suppressed using a tuned circuit. Image frequency should be removed
before the mixer stage.

Image (Frequency) Rejection Ratio: IRR = ; Gain at fsi << 1

By increasing the Intermediate frequency, IRR can be increased. By increasing the bandwidth,
the gain at fSi can be decreased so that IRR increases.

IRR ∝ IRR∝ Q

IRR = √1 + Where ρ = -

IRR should be as high as possible. If two tuned circuits are cascaded then the overall IRR is

2 2
= √1 + . √1 +
1 2

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 205
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.7: Noise in Analog Modulation


Thermal noise is white noise. It effects all frequencies equally.

P =K Te B ; KT=PSD of thermal noise, Te=Noise equivalent


temperature

Te =(F-1)T0 ; F=Noise figure

KTe= = =

Noise Power = Mean square Value ∫ fX(x) dX

= Auto Correlation at origin RX(0) = ∫ ( )

Figure of Merit:

Si So
Receiver
Ni No

ower of the modulated signal ower of the demodulated signal


(Si i) = (So o) =
ower of noise in message andwidth ower of noise at output

( )
Figure of Merit = =
( )

(S/N)o depends mainly on modulation scheme and receiver characteristics.


Figure of Merit of DSB system: = ⁄
=1

Figure of Merit of SSB system: = =1

Figure of Merit of AM system: = = [modulation efficiency]

Figure of Merit of FM system: = = (For single-tone modulation)

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 206
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

8.8: Digital Communications


Advantages of Digital communication over Analog communications:

1. More rugged because it can withstand channel noise and distortion much better,
2. Viability of regenerative repeaters
3. Digital signals can be coded to yield extremely low error rates and high fidelity,
4. It is easier and more efficient to multiplex several digital signals.
5. More efficient than analog in realizing the exchange of SNR for bandwidth.

Sampling Theorem: It sates that “if the highest frequency in the signal spectrum is B, the signal
can e reconstructed from its samples, ta en at a rate not less than 2B samples per second”.

Ts ; fs ≥ 2 W

fs=2W is called the Nyquist rate

Pulse Digital Communications: There are four types of pulse digital communication techniques.

1. PCM 2. DPCM 3. DM 4. ADM

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

For n- bit PCM,


Number of quantization levels L=2

Step size δ=

Bit rate(r ) = sampling rate ×n= n=

Bit duration (T ) = =

Minimum BW = =

f(qe)

Signal to Quantization Noise Ratio: 1/δ

m(t) = Amcos 2πfmt


qe
Signal Power = /2 -δ/2 δ/2

Quantization Noise Power = ∫ x f(x)dx =∫ q .(1 δe) dqe =

SNR= = =(3/2)L2=(3/2)22n , where δ =


( )

SNRdB =1.8 + 6n

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 207
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

Differential Encoding

1-previous state

0-previous level is complemented

Input 1 0 0 1 1 0

Output 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

For NRZ signaling, the probability of error is minimum. Thus for PCM, NRZ signaling is generally
used.

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM):

Number of signals transmitted simultaneously = N

If n-bit PCM is used, Number of bits in frame = nN

For each frame some extra bits are added for synchronization purpose.

In Ts duration, we get n N + a bits, where a = No. of bits used for synchronization

Bit duration Tb = without multiplexing

= with multiplexing

= with multiplexing & synchronization

DPCM (Differential Pulse Code Modulation):


In place of sampled value, the difference between present sample and its predicted value is sent.
So compare to PCM, for same SNR, BW of the system can be reduced or for same BW SNR can be
improved.

Delta Modulation (DM):


The message is sampled at very high frequency compared to NR. Here the difference between
present and previous sample is found and sent in the form of only one bit. In DM system, bit rate
is equal to sampling rate.

1) Slope overload error slope overload error occurs when the step size is very low.
2) Granular Noise: It occurs when the step size is high.

< = m(t) Slope Overload error

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 208
Quick Refresher Guide Communication System

Adaptive Delta Modulation (ADM): ADM involves additional hardware designed to provide
variable step size, thereby reducing slope-overload effects without increasing the granular noise.

Digital Carrier Modulation


Bandwidth required for ASK = PSK < FSK
ASK and FSK can be demodulated non-coherently but not PSK.

Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK)

Binary data
On-off
DPSK signal
Amplitude level NRZ
Multiplier
shifter

Delay Tb

1 0 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 0

1800 1800 00 00 00 1800

Advantage of DPSK over PSK is, DPSK can be non-coherently demodulated.

Matched filter impulse response : h (t) = s(T - t)

Probability of Error

ASK signal: Pe = 0.5 Q[√ ]

FSK signal: Pe = 0.5 Q[√ ]

PSK signal: ∴ e = 0.5 Q [√ ]

Pe, PSK < Pe, ASK, Pe, FSK

So, PSK is preferred compared to ASK and FSK because it has less Pe.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 209
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Part – 9: Electromagnetic Theory


9.1: Electromagnetic Field

Cartesian Coordinates Cylindrical Coordinates Spherical Coordinates


(a) Differential displacement dl = d + d +dz z dl = dr r + rd
dl = dx + dy + dz + r sin d
(b) Differential area ds = d z ds = r sin
ds = dydz x = d dz = r sin r
= dxdz y = d = r dr d
= dxdy z
(c) Differential volume dv = dz dv = r sin
dv = dxdydz

Operators
a) V – gradient .V – divergence

V – curl V – laplacian

= (Cartesian)
= (Cylindrical)
= (Spherical)
r r

V V V
V=
x x y y z z
V V V
= z
z
V V V
= r
r

x y z
.A =
x y z
z
= (
z

= (r ( sin
r

A=| |
x y z

= | |
z

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 210
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

r r sin
= | |
r r r sin

Physical Constants

Permittivity of free space, ε0 = 8.854 10-12 F/m = ( /36 π 0-9 F/m

Permeability of free space, μ0 = 4π 10-7 H/m

Impedance of free space, η0 = 20 π Ohms = 377 Ohms

Velocity of free space, c = 3 108 m/sec = 3 1010 cm/sec

Charge of an Electron, q = 1.602 10-19 C

Mass of electron, m = 9.107 10 -31 kg

Boltzm n’s onst nt, k = 1.38 10-23 J/K

Pl n k’s onst nt h = 1.054 10-34 J-s

Base of natural logarithm, e = 2.718

Coulom ’s L w: The m them ti l expression of Coulom ’s l w is

Q Q
F= ̂
R
4π R

Electric Field Intensity: It is defined as force per unit charge, and its unit is newton/coulomb (or)
volt/meter. The electric field starts at a positive charge and ends at a negative charge.

Electric Dipole

 Two equal and opposite electric charges, separated by a very short distance is called electric
dipole.
 The electric dipole moment is Qd. The electric field intensity of a dipole varies as 1/R 3;
where as the electric field intensity of a point charge varies as. 1/R2.
 Electric flux density D = E
 This ve tor h s the s me ire tion s E, ut it is in epen ent of ‘ε’ n therefore of m teri l
properties. The unit of ‘D’ is Coulom /meter2
 G uss’s l w:
Divergen e of ele tri flux ensity is equ l to volume h rge ensity v mathematically,
.D =

Electric Potential

The potential at any point is the work per unit charge required to bring a unit charge from
infinity to a point. Due to a point charge, Q

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 211
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Absolute potential at a point r = a is Va = Q/4πεa

Absolute potential at a point r = b is Vb = Q / 4πεb

Potenti l ifferen e etween ‘ ’ n ‘ ’ is Vab = Va – Vb = ( )

The potenti l only epen s on the ist n e etween points ‘ ’ n ‘ ’ n the point h rge,
reg r less of p th etween ‘ ’ n ‘ ’.

The lines of constant potential are always perpendicular to the electric field intensity. E = - V.

Biot–Savart law: The Biot–Savart law is used to compute the magnetic field generated by a
steady current, i.e. a continual flow of charges, The equation is as follows:

̂
B=∫ , or B = ∫ (in SI units),

Ampère's Circuital Law

∮ B = μ ∬ J . S Or equivalently, ∮ B =μ I

 Jf is the free current density through the surface S enclosed by the curve C

 Ien is the net free current that penetrates through the surface S.

The Magnetic Vector Potential (A)


The magnetic vector potential is always in the direction of the current (and perpendicular to B).

. B = 0, B=

. = 0 and is called the coulomb guage for static fields.

mpere’s l w is H=J
B = μJ
Since, B = , = μJ
( . . = μJ Taking . =0
- = μJ
i.e., = μJ
The ove equ tion is ve tor Poisson’s equ tion

Energy Density of Electric and Magnetic Fields


U= E B ,

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 212
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Type Capacitance Comment


Parallel-plate capacitor εA/d A: Area
d: Distance
Coaxial cable 2πεl : Inner radius
n( / : Outer radius
: length
Concentric spheres 4πε : Inner radius
: Outer radius
Sphere 4πε a : Radius
Circular disc 8ε a : Radius

Stored energy in Inductance

The energy stored by an inductor is equal to the amount of work required to establish the
current through the inductor, and therefore the magnetic field. This is given by:

E = LI where L =

where denotes the magnetic flux through the area spanned by the loop, and N is the number of
wire turns. The flux linkage thus is N = Li.

Inductance of a Solenoid L = μ N /l.

The Continuity Equation general form

.J = ⁄ t

. J = 0, if = constant

Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic Induction states that: V = N ,

M xwell’s Equations
Static Time – Varying
H= J H= J J
E= 0 E= B⁄ t
.D = .D =
.B = 0 .B = 0
H= J J is mo ifie mpere’s l w

E= B⁄ t is F r y’s l w

.D = is G uss’s l w for ele tri fiel

.B = 0 is G uss’s l w for m gneti fiel

D = E, is electric flux density

B = μH, is magnetic flux density

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 213
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Jc = σE is conduction current density, (this relation is referred to as


Ohm’s l w .

JD = D⁄ t is displacement current density

 The ratio of conduction current density of displacement current density is referred to as loss
tangent. i.e. loss tangent = (Jc / JD = (σ / )
 If (σ / ) > > 1, the medium is referred to as high loss medium
 If (σ / ) < < 1, the medium is referred to as low loss medium
 If = 0, lose less medium

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 214
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

9.2: EM Wave Propagation


General Wave Equations

Consider a uniform but source – free medium having electric permittivity (ε), magnetic
perme ility (μ , n on u tivity (σ . In this medium Maxwell equations are

H = σE ε( E⁄ t (1)

E= μ ( B⁄ t (2)

.D = 0 .E = 0 (3)

.B = 0 .H = 0 (4)

Plane Wave in a Dielectric medium

Prop g tion Const nt = α jβ = √j μ(σ j ε


 Attenuation constant α = √ [√ ]

 Phase shift constant β = √ [√ ]
 When σ = 0 (lossless : α = 0, β = √με
 When σ/ ε < < 1 (low loss): α= √ , β √με

 When σ/ ε > > 1(High loss): α =β= √

Considering an electromagnetic wave propagating in z-direction, electric and magnetic fields


associated with this wave to be entirely transverse to Z – direction. Hence it is referred to as
TEM.

When electric fields are transverse to z – direction, the EM wave is said to be TE wave

When magnetic fields are transverse to z – direction, the EM wave is said to be TM wave.

 The r tio of |E| n |H| is referre to s intrinsi impe n e, |E| / |H| = η, (Ex / Hy =
-(Ey /Hx) = η
 Intrinsi impe n e, η = √

 For lossless me ium (σ=0 n low loss me ium (σ/ ε < < : η=√

 For high loss me ium (σ/ ε > > : η= √ = √ 45

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 215
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

The medium property can be summarized as

Lossless Dielectric σ=0 ε=ε ε μ=μ μ σ ε

Lossy Dielectric σ 0 ε=ε ε μ=μ μ

Good Conductor σ ε=ε ε μ=μ μ σ ε

Poynting Vector (P) ⃗P = ⃗E ⃗H


⃗ watt/m2.

The direction of Poynting vector indicates the direction of wave propagation. Poynting vector
in i tes the power ensity sso i te with n ele trom gneti w ve. The Poynting’s theorem
gives the net flow of power out of a given volume thorough its surface.

General expression for Poynting vector

P(z, t) = e os os (2 t 2βz Watt/m2


| |

Time average Poynting vector can be represented as

P (z = ∫ P(z, t t = e os
| |

The total time average power crossing a given surface S is given by

P =∫ . S

Phase Velocity: The phase velocity of the wave is vp = /β

Where β = √με for σ = 0 n σ/w ε < < n β = √( μσ⁄2 for σ/ ε > > 1.

In a losses or low loss medium phase velocity is constant; where as in a high loss medium, phase
velocity is proportional to frequency, non – linearly.

In high loss me ium β = √ n skin epth, δ = /α = / β

V = ⁄β = δ

W ve length, λ = 2π / β = 2πδ

Phase velocity in good conductors is very small, when compared to the phase velocity in
iele tri s or free sp e, e use ‘δ’ is sm ll.

Depth of Penetr tion or Skin Depth (δ : It is defined as the distance to which the electromagnetic
wave propagates, when the field strength decreases to 1/e times of its initial field strength.

δ= δ= = √ δ=
√ √

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 216
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

The skin depth is useful in calculating the ac resistance due to skin effect.

R =

Surface or skin resistance (unit width and unit length) is the real part of the η for a good
conductor

R = =√

So for width w and length l, ac resistance is calculated as

R = =

For a conductor wire of radius a, = 2π , so

= =

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 217
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

9.3: Transmission Lines


Parallel Conductor Transmission Line: Capacitance per unit length is C = ( /
F/m

Inductance per unit length L= ln( / H/m

Z0 = √L/C √ ln( / = log (d/a) Ohms

Where‘ ’ is sp ing etween on u tors, ‘ ’ is ross-sectional radius of conductor.

Coaxial Line: Capacitance per unit length C= ( /


F/m

Inductor per unit length L = ln ( ) H/m

Z0 = √L/C √ ln( = log (b/a) Ohms


Where ‘ ’ is r ius of outer on u tor n ‘ ’ is r ius of inner on u tor

Transmission Line Theory

Transmission line wave equations


=

Series impe n e Z=R j L Ohm/m and shunt admittance Y = G j C mho/m

= √ZY = √(R j L (G j C = α jβ

(
Characteristics impedance Z0 = √Z/Y = √
(

For a lossless line, R = 0, G = 0 & Z0 = √L/C

Velo ity with w ve prop g tion is v = /β

If R = 0, G = 0 or if R & G are small v= /β= =


√ √

Transmission & Reflection of Waves on a Transmission Line


The ratio of the maximum to minimum values is defined as the voltage standing wave ratio or
VSWR
| ( | | |
S = VSWR = | ( |
= | |

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 218
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Impedance of a Transmission Line


Input impedance of the line of length l is given y, Zin = Z0

For α = 0, = jβ, tanh jβz = j tan βz

Z(z) = Z0 and Zin = Z0

1. For the line terminated in its characteristic impedance, Zin = Z0


2. ZL = 0 (line terminated by with a short ), input impedance is, Zin = j Z0 t n βl
3. ZL = (line terminated by an open ciruit), the input impedance is, Zin = j Z ot βl
Scattering Parameters: The S-parameter matrix for the 2-port network, is given by
S S
[ ]=[ ]* +
S S
S = = and S = =

S = = and S = =

Each 2-port S-parameter has the following generic descriptions:


S is the input port voltage reflection coefficient
S is the reverse voltage gain
S is the forward voltage gain
S is the output port voltage reflection coefficient

Strip line: The characteristic impedance of strip line (transmission line) is


.
Z0 = ln .
Ohm

Where w = width of the strip
d = distance between both reference planes
T = Thickness of the strip

The propagation delay of signal on a strip line is tpd 33 √ε ps/cm

Microstipline: The characteristic impedance of a wide microstrip line can be expressed as

Z0 = √ = ( ) ohms

The wave length in the micro strip line is given by g = cm, where f is frequency in GHz.

The quality factor of the wide microstrip line is expressed as Qc = 39.5 ( ) (f) × 109

Where ‘h’ is in m n Rs = √

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 219
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

9.4: Guided E.M Waves


Rectangular Wave Guide

We can divide the field configuration within the guide into two sets.
i. Transverse magnetic mode (TM)Hz =0
ii. Transverse electric mode (TE)Ez =0

Transverse Magnetic(TM) mode: (Hz =0)

Electric field Ez = C sin x sin y


m= ,n= TM11 mode
m = , n = 2 TM12 mode
m = 2, n = 3 TM21 mode and so on

Smallest mode is TM11

Propagation Constant γ = √( ) ( )

√( ) Cut-off Wavelength λc =
Cut-off Frequency fc = ( ) √( ) ( )

This expression shows that the velocity of wave propagation in the guide is greater than the
phase velocity in free space:

Velocity of wave propagation v = =


√ ( ) ( )

Wavelength inside waveguide λ =


√ ( ) ( )

For a wave to propagate through the wave guide. f > fc or λ < λc

For TM, mode Hx = Asin Bx cos Ay

Hy = Bcos Bx sinAy where , B = , A=

Ex = Bcos Bx sinAy

Ey = Asin Bx cos Ay

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 220
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Transverse Electric (TE) mode (EZ=0)

Hz =C cos Bx cosAy

Ex = CAcos Bx sinAy

Ey = CB sin Bx cos Ay where , B = , A=

Hx = CB sinBx cos Ay

Hy = CAcos Bx sin Ay

Cut off Wavelength λc = √( ) ( )


√( ) ( ) Cut off Frequency fc =

Lowest order TE wave in rectangular guides is therefore the TE 10 wave. This wave which has the
lowest cut-off frequency is called the dominant wave.

Characteristic Impedance or Wave Impedance:

It is the ratio of transverse component of ⃗ to the transverse component of ⃗

TE Mode
η =
√ ( )

Where η = characteristic impedance of free space.

as > . . . η > η for TE mode

TM Mode

η < ηf
η = ηf √ ( )

For TEM mode: Zz (TEM) = 𝛈

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 221
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Circular Waveguide

Assume r ius of the ir ul r w vegui e ‘ ’

Case 1: For TE mode

v h
TE nm f = h =h (lowest) = 1.841
2π .

.
f =

2π TE11 mode is
λc == = .84
= 3.41a
dominant mode

Case 2: TMnm Mode

f = , h01(lowest) = 2.405
.
TM01 mode f = λc =
.

Cavity Resonators:

Frequency of oscillation for TEmnp f = √( ) ( ) ( )

Dominant mode (TE101)

Circular Resonators

Case 1: TE nmp mode h =1.841

f0 = √( ) ( ) dominant mode TE111

Case 2: TE nmp mode h =2.405

f0 = √( ) ( ) Minimum frequency for TM mode - TM 011

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 222
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

9.5: Antennas

Hertzian Dipole
The Hertzian dipole is an elemental antenna consisting of an infinitesimally long piece of wire
carrying an alternating current I(t).
The ele tri fiel strength ‘E’ n ‘H’ is given y

E0 = ( )

Er = ( ) and

H = ( ) where t1 = t – r/c

Consider the expression for H . It consists of two terms, one of which varies inversely as r and
the other inversely as r2. The two fields will have equal amplitudes at that value of r, which
makes
I / r2 = / rc r = c / = λ / 2π λ / 6

The total power radiated is = 80 π2 ( l/λ 2 I


The radiation resistance of the current element is: Rrad = 80 π2 (dl / λ)2 ohms

Field Regions
The space surrounding an antenna is usually subdivided into three regions.
(i) Reactive near field (or) oscillating near field, R R1
(ii) Radiating near field (or) Fresnel field (or) inductive field, R1 R R2
(iii) Far field (or) Fraunhofer field (or) radiating field, R2 R

Regions are as shown below:

R1 = 0.62 √( /λ
R2 = 2d2 / λ

‘ ’ is m ximum over ll imension of the ntenn , ‘λ’ is oper ting w velength. The r i l ist n e
at which the radiating near field and radiating far are equal is 2 ⁄

Radiation Intensity
R i tion Intensity in given ire tion is efine s “the power r i te from n ntenn per
unit soli ngle”.
U = r2 Wrad
Where U = radiation intensity w / unit solid angle; Wrad = radiation power density W/m2.
The radiation intensity of an isotropic source is U0 = Prad / 4π

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 223
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

Gain, Directive & Directivity


Gain:
Power g in of n ntenn is efine s “4π times the r tio of the r i tions intensity to the net
power accepted by the antenna from a connected transmitter”.

GP = Gain = = U( , )
Total radiated power is related to the total input power by Prad = et. pin where ‘et’ is the tot l
antenna efficiency

Directivity:
It is “the v lue of the ire tive g in in the ire tion of its m ximum v lue”. The ire tivity of
non-isotropic source is equal to the ratio of its maximum radiation intensity over that of an
isotropic source.
Gd = U / U0 = 4πU / Prad
D = (Umax) / U0 = 4π Umax / Prad = G max.

Where Gd = directive gain, D = directivity, U = radiation intensity, U max = maximum radiation


intensity, U0 = radiation intensity of isotropic source, Prad = total radiation power.
For n isotropi sour e ‘Gd’ n ‘D’ will e unity.

The values of directive gain will be equal to or greater than zero and equal to or less than the
directivity (0 Gd D)

Antenna Radiation Efficiency:


The antenna efficiency takes into account the reflection, conduction and dielectric losses. The
resistance RL is used to represent the condition-dielectric losses.
The radiation efficiency, η = R / (R R
R = Rhf = (l/ p) Rs where Rs= 1/(σδ) = √( μ/2σ
= (l/p) √( μ/2σ where δ = √2/( μσ

Effective Aperture
It is defined as the ratio of the power delivered to the load to the incident power density.
The maximum effective aperture of any antenna is related to its directivity by
Ae = (λ /4π D Where ‘D’ is directivity

Few Characteristics of Wire Antennas


Herzian Dipole
The directivity of the Hertzian dipole is given by D = Pr(max)/ Pr(av) = 1.5
The effective area is Ae = 3λ /8π = .5 (λ /4π = λ /4π (D
Ae = 0.1194 λ or D = (4π / λ ) Ac
Although we have obtained this result for a Hertzian dipole, it holds for any antenna.
Half- wave Dipole
Rrad = 73 ohms; Directivity D = 1.64; Ac = (λ /4π ( .642

Quarter – wave Monopole:


Rrad = 36.5 ohms
Directivity of the Quarter wave monopole is 3.28.

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 224
Quick Refresher Guide EMT

The quarter – wave monopole is essentially half of wave dipole placed on a perfect ground
conducting plane.

Antenna Arrays

In general, the far field due to a two-element array is given by

E(total) = (E due to single element at origin) (array factor)

/
Array Factor for 2-element array AF = 2 os ( os

Array Factor for n-element array AF = , = os

1. AF has the maximum value of N; thus the normalized AF is obtained by dividing AF by N.


The principal maximum occurs when = 0, that is
0 = β os α or os =
2. AF has nulls (or zeros) when AF = 0, that is
= kπ, k = 1, 2, 3 . . . .
3. A broadside array has its maximum radiation directed normal to the axis of the array, that
is, = 0, = 90° so th t α = 0.
4. An end-fire array has its maximum radiation directed along the axis of the array, that is, =
0 β
0, = [ so th t α = [
π β

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 225
Quick Refresher Guide Reference Books

Reference Books
Mathematics:

 Higher Engineering Mathematics – Dr. BS Grewal


 Advance Engineering Mathematics – Erwin Kreyszig
 Advance Engineering Mathematics – Dr. HK Dass

Signals and Systems:


 Signals & Systems – Oppenheim & Schafer
 Signals & Systems – Simon Hykin & Barry Van Veen
 Discrete Time Signal Processing – Oppenheim & Schafer
 Analog & Digital signal Processing – Ashok Ambarder
 Digital Signal Processing – Proakis

Control Systems:

 Control System Engg. – Nagrath & Gopal


 Automatic Control Systems – Benjamin C Kuo
 Modern Control System – Katsuhiko Ogata

Networks:

 Network Analysis –Van Valkenburg


 Networks & System – D Roy & Choudhary
 Engineering circuit analysis – Hayt & Kammerly

Electronic Devices:

 Semiconductor devices – David Neamen


 Semiconductor devices – Kano
 Solid Sate devices – Suresh Babu
 Electronics devices and circuits – Millman & Halkias

Analog Circuits:

 Micro Electronics circuit – Sedra & Smith


 Integrated Electronics : Analog & Digital circuits and system – Millman & Halkias
 Electronics devices and circuits – Boylestead
 Op-Amp & Linear Integrated Circuits – Gaikwad
 Linear Integrated circuits – Godse & Bakshi
 Micro Electronic Circuits – Neamen
 Micro electronic circuits – Rashid

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 226
Quick Refresher Guide Reference Books

Digital circuits:
 Digital Electronics – Morris Mano
 Digital principles & Design – Donald Givone
 Digital circuits – Taub & Schilling
 Microprocessor – Ramesh Gaonker

Electromagnetics:

 Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balsain
 Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – Sadiku
 Engg Electromagnetics – William Hayt
 Antenna And Wave Propagation – KD Prasad
 Microwave devices & circuits – Lio

Communications:

 Communication systems – Simon Hykin


 Principals of communication systems – Taub & Schilling
 An introduction to Analog and Digital Communications – Simon Hykin
 Modern & digital communication system – BP Lathi
 Electronic communication system – Kennedy
 Analog Communication – Proakis
 Digital Communication – Proakis

THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30th Cross, 10th Main, Jayanagar 4th Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 227

Вам также может понравиться